TMS320F28053PNQ [TI]
Piccolo Microcontrollers; Piccolo微处理器型号: | TMS320F28053PNQ |
厂家: | TEXAS INSTRUMENTS |
描述: | Piccolo Microcontrollers |
文件: | 总143页 (文件大小:1522K) |
中文: | 中文翻译 | 下载: | 下载PDF数据表文档文件 |
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Piccolo Microcontrollers
Check for Samples: TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053, TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
1 TMS320F2805x ( Piccolo™) MCUs
1.1 Features
123
• Highlights
• Programmable Control Law Accelerator (CLA)
– 32-Bit Floating-Point Math Accelerator
– High-Efficiency 32-Bit CPU ( TMS320C28x™)
– 60-MHz Device
– Single 3.3-V Supply
– Executes Code Independently of the Main
CPU
• Low Device and System Cost:
– Single 3.3-V Supply
– Integrated Power-on and Brown-out Resets
– Two Internal Zero-pin Oscillators
– Up to 42 Multiplexed GPIO Pins
– Three 32-Bit CPU Timers
– On-Chip Flash, SARAM, Message RAM, OTP,
CLA Data ROM, Boot ROM, Secure ROM
Memory
– No Power Sequencing Requirement
– Integrated Power-on Reset and Brown-out
Reset
– Low Power
– No Analog Support Pins
• Clocking:
– Dual-Zone Security Module
– Serial Port Peripherals (SCI/SPI/I2C/eCAN)
– Enhanced Control Peripherals
– Two Internal Zero-pin Oscillators
– On-Chip Crystal Oscillator/External Clock
Input
– Dynamic PLL Ratio Changes Supported
– Watchdog Timer Module
– Missing Clock Detection Circuitry
•
•
•
Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM)
Enhanced Capture (eCAP)
Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse
(eQEP)
– Analog Peripherals
• Up to 42 Individually Programmable,
Multiplexed GPIO Pins With Input Filtering
•
One 12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter
(ADC)
• Peripheral Interrupt Expansion (PIE) Block That
Supports All Peripheral Interrupts
•
•
One On-Chip Temperature Sensor
• Three 32-Bit CPU Timers
• Independent 16-Bit Timer in Each ePWM
Module
Up to Seven Comparators With up to
Three Integrated Digital-to-Analog
Converters (DACs)
•
•
One Buffered Reference DAC
Up to Four Programmable Gain
Amplifiers (PGAs)
• On-Chip Memory
– Flash, SARAM, Message RAM, OTP, CLA
Data ROM, Boot ROM, Secure ROM Available
•
Up to Four Digital Filters
• 128-Bit Security Key and Lock
– Protects Secure Memory Blocks
– Prevents Firmware Reverse Engineering
• Serial Port Peripherals
– 80-Pin Package
• High-Efficiency 32-Bit CPU ( TMS320C28x™)
– 60 MHz (16.67-ns Cycle Time)
– 16 x 16 and 32 x 32 MAC Operations
– 16 x 16 Dual MAC
– Three SCI (UART) Modules
– One SPI Module
– Harvard Bus Architecture
– One Inter-Integrated-Circuit (I2C) Bus
– Atomic Operations
– One Enhanced Controller Area Network
(eCAN) Bus
• Advanced Emulation Features
– Fast Interrupt Response and Processing
– Unified Memory Programming Model
– Code-Efficient (in C/C++ and Assembly)
• Endianness: Little Endian
– Analysis and Breakpoint Functions
– Real-Time Debug via Hardware
• 80-Pin PN Low-Profile Quad Flatpack (LQFP)
1
Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of
Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet.
Piccolo, TMS320C28x, C28x, TMS320C2000, Code Composer Studio, XDS510, XDS560 are trademarks of Texas
2
Instruments.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
3
ADVANCE INFORMATION concerns new products in the sampling or preproduction
phase of development. Characteristic data and other specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
1.2 Description
The F2805x Piccolo™ family of microcontrollers provides the power of the C28x™ core and Control Law
Accelerator (CLA) coupled with highly integrated control peripherals in low pin-count devices. This family
is code-compatible with previous C28x-based code, as well as providing a high level of analog integration.
An internal voltage regulator allows for single rail operation. Analog comparators with internal 6-bit
references have been added and can be routed directly to control the PWM outputs. The ADC converts
from 0 to 3.3-V fixed full scale range and supports ratio-metric VREFHI/VREFLO references. The ADC
interface has been optimized for low overhead/latency.
The Analog Front End (AFE) contains up to seven comparators with up to three integrated Digital-to-
Analog Converters (DACs), one VREFOUT-buffered DAC, up to four Programmable Gain Amplifiers
(PGAs), and up to four digital filters. The Programmable Gain Amplifiers (PGAs) are capable of amplifying
the input signal in three discrete gain modes. The actual gain itself depends on the resistors defined by
the user at the bipolar input end. The actual number of AFE peripherals will depend upon the 2805x
device number. See Table 2-1 for more details.
2
TMS320F2805x ( Piccolo™) MCUs
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
1.3 Functional Block Diagram
Z1/Z2 User OTP
Secure
M0
SARAM 1Kx16
(0-wait)
L0 SARAM (2Kx16)
(0-wait, Secure)
CLA Data RAM2
FLASH
M1
SARAM 1Kx16
(0-wait)
L1 DPSARAM (1Kx16)
(0-wait, Secure)
CLA Data RAM0
28055, 28054: 64K x 16, 10 Sectors
Dual-
Zone
Security
Module
+
ECSL
28053, 28052, 28051: 32K x 16, 5 Sectors
L2 DPSARAM (1Kx16)
(0-wait, Secure)
CLA Data RAM1
28050: 16K x 16, 3 Sectors
Boot ROM
12Kx16
Secure
L3 DPSARAM (4Kx16)
(0-wait, Secure)
CLA Program RAM
(0-wait)
Non-Secure
PUMP
Secure ROM(A)
2Kx16
OTP/Flash Wrapper
PSWD
CLA Data ROM
(4Kx16)
(0-wait)
Secure
Memory Bus
TRST
TCK
CLA +
Message RAMs
C28x CPU
(60 MHz)
TDI
TMS
TDO
GPIO
Mux
GPIO
CTRIPnOUT
MUX
X1
X2
COMP
+
CPU Timer 0
OSC1,
OSC2,
Ext,
XRS
Digital
Filter
COMPAn
COMPBn
CPU Timer 1
POR/
BOR
PLL,
LPM,
WD
VREG
Program-
mable
Gain
CPU Timer 2
PIE
(up to 96 interrupts)
XCLKIN
Amps
ADC
0-wait
Result
Regs
LPM Wakeup
GPIO
Mux
3 External Interrupts
ADC
3.75
MSPS
Memory Bus
32-bit Peripheral Bus
(CLA-accessible)
32-bit Peripheral Bus
(CLA-accessible)
32-Bit
Peripheral Bus
16-bit Peripheral Bus
SCI-A,
SCI-B, SCI-C
(4L FIFO)
eCAN-A
SPI-A
I2C-A
eCAP
eQEP
ePWM1–ePWM7
(4L FIFO)
(4L FIFO)
(32-mbox)
GPIO MUX
A. Stores Secure Copy Code Functions on all devices.
B. Not all peripheral pins are available at the same time due to multiplexing.
Figure 1-1. Functional Block Diagram
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
TMS320F2805x ( Piccolo™) MCUs
3
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
1
2
TMS320F2805x ( Piccolo™) MCUs .................. 1
1.1 Features ............................................. 1
1.2 Description ........................................... 2
1.3 Functional Block Diagram ........................... 3
Device Overview ........................................ 5
2.1 Device Characteristics ............................... 5
2.2 Memory Maps ........................................ 8
2.3 Brief Descriptions ................................... 15
2.4 Register Map ....................................... 26
2.5 Device Emulation Registers ........................ 28
2.6 VREG, BOR, POR .................................. 30
2.7 System Control ..................................... 32
2.8 Low-power Modes Block ........................... 40
2.9 Thermal Design Considerations .................... 40
Device Pins ............................................. 41
3.1 Pin Assignments .................................... 41
3.2 Terminal Functions ................................. 42
Device Operating Conditions ....................... 50
4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................ 50
4.2 Recommended Operating Conditions .............. 50
5.1 Power Sequencing ................................. 58
5.2 Clocking ............................................ 60
5.3 Interrupts ............................................ 63
Peripheral Information and Timings ............... 68
6.1 Parameter Information .............................. 68
6.2 Control Law Accelerator (CLA) ..................... 69
6.3 Analog Block ........................................ 72
6.4 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) .................... 91
6
6.5
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) ........... 100
Enhanced Controller Area Network (eCAN) ...... 103
6.6
6.7 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) ...................... 107
Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) ....... 110
6.8
6.9 Enhanced Capture Module (eCAP) ............... 118
6.10 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) .... 120
6.11 JTAG Port ......................................... 123
6.12 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) ............ 125
Device and Documentation Support ............. 136
7.1 Device Support .................................... 136
7.2 Documentation Support ........................... 138
7.3 Community Resources ............................ 138
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable
Information ............................................ 139
8.1 Thermal Data for Package ........................ 139
8.2 Packaging Information ............................ 139
3
4
7
8
4.3
Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended
Operating Conditions (Unless Otherwise Noted) ... 51
4.4 Current Consumption ............................... 52
4.5 Flash Timing ........................................ 56
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts ........... 58
5
4
Contents
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
2 Device Overview
2.1 Device Characteristics
Table 2-1 lists the features of the TMS320F2805x devices.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
5
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 2-1. TMS320F2805x Hardware Features
28055
28054
28053
28052
28051
28050
FEATURE
(60 MHz)
(60 MHz)
(60 MHz)
(60 MHz)
(60 MHz)
(60 MHz)
80-Pin PN
LQFP
80-Pin PN
LQFP
80-Pin PN
LQFP
80-Pin PN
LQFP
80-Pin PN
LQFP
80-Pin PN
LQFP
Package Type
Instruction cycle
16.67 ns
Yes
16.67 ns
No
16.67 ns
Yes
16.67 ns
No
16.67 ns
No
16.67 ns
No
Control Law Accelerator (CLA)
On-chip flash (16-bit word)
On-chip SARAM (16-bit word)
64K
64K
32K
32K
32K
16K
10K
10K
10K
10K
8K
6K
Dual-zone security for on-chip Flash, SARAM, OTP,
and Secure ROM blocks
Yes
Yes
1K
Yes
Yes
1K
Yes
Yes
1K
Yes
Yes
1K
Yes
Yes
1K
Yes
Yes
1K
Boot ROM (12K x 16)
One-time programmable (OTP) ROM
(16-bit word)
ePWM outputs
eCAP inputs
eQEP modules
Watchdog timer
MSPS
14
1
14
1
14
1
14
1
14
1
14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Yes
3.75
267 ns
16
Yes
3.75
267 ns
16
Yes
3.75
267 ns
16
Yes
3.75
267 ns
16
Yes
2
Yes
2
Conversion Time
500 ns
16
500 ns
16
12-Bit ADC
Channels
Temperature Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dual
Sample-and-Hold
Yes
4
Yes
4
Yes
4
Yes
4
Yes
4
Yes
3
Programmable Gain Amplifier (PGA)
(Gains = ~3, ~6, ~11)
Fixed Gain Amplifier
(Gain = ~3)
3
3
3
3
3
4
Comparators
7
7
7
7
7
6
Internal Comparator Reference DACs
Buffered Reference DAC
3
3
3
3
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
32-Bit CPU timers
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
Inter-integrated circuit (I2C)
Enhanced Controller Area Network (eCAN)
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
0-pin Oscillators
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
I/O pins (shared)
GPIO
42
3
42
3
42
3
42
3
42
3
42
3
External interrupts
Supply voltage (nominal)
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
6
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 2-1. TMS320F2805x Hardware Features (continued)
28055
(60 MHz)
28054
(60 MHz)
28053
(60 MHz)
28052
(60 MHz)
28051
(60 MHz)
28050
(60 MHz)
FEATURE
T: –40ºC to 105ºC
S: –40ºC to 125ºC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Temperature options
Product status(1)
TMX
TMX
TMX
TMX
TMX
TMX
(1) See Section 7.1.2, Device and Development Support Tool Nomenclature, for descriptions of device stages. The "TMX" product status denotes an experimental device that is not
necessarily representative of the final device's electrical specifications.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
7
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.2 Memory Maps
In Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, and Figure 2-4, the following apply:
•
•
Memory blocks are not to scale.
Peripheral Frame 0, Peripheral Frame 1, Peripheral Frame 2, and Peripheral Frame 3 memory maps
are restricted to data memory only. A user program cannot access these memory maps in program
space.
•
•
Protected means the order of Write-followed-by-Read operations is preserved rather than the pipeline
order.
Certain memory ranges are EALLOW protected against spurious writes after configuration.
8
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Data Space
Prog Space
0x00 0000
0x00 0040
0x00 0400
0x00 0800
0x00 0D00
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
Peripheral Frame 0
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
Reserved
0x00 0E00
0x00 1400
Peripheral Frame 0
CLA Registers
0x00 1480
0x00 1500
0x00 1580
0x00 2000
0x00 6000
CLA-to-CPU Message RAM
CPU-to-CLA Message RAM
Peripheral Frame 0
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 1
(1K x 16, Protected)
0x00 6400
0x00 6A00
0x00 7000
0x00 8000
0x00 8800
0x00 8C00
0x00 9000
Peripheral Frame 3
(1.5K x 16, Protected)
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 1
(1.5K x 16, Protected)
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
L0 DPSARAM (2K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Data RAM 2)
L1 DPSARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Data RAM 0)
L2 DPSARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Data RAM 1)
L3 DPSARAM (4K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Prog RAM)
0x00 A000
0x00 F000
0x01 0000
Reserved
CLA Data ROM (4K x 16)
Reserved
0x3D 7800
0x3D 7A00
0x3D 7C00
User OTP, Zone 2 Passwords (512 x 16)
User OTP, Zone 1 Passwords (512 x 16)
Reserved
0x3D 7E00
0x3D 7FCB
Calibration Data
Configuration Data
Reserved
0x3D 7FF0
0x3E 8000
FLASH
(64K x 16, 10 Sectors, Dual Secure Zone + ECSL)
(Z1/Z2 User-Selectable Security Zone Per Sector)
0x3F 7FFF
0x3F 8000
Zone 1 Secure Copy Code ROM
(1K x 16)
0x3F 8400
Zone 2 Secure Copy Code ROM
(1K x 16)
0x3F 8800
0x3F D000
0x3F FFC0
Reserved
Boot ROM (12K x 16, 0-Wait)
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
A. CLA-specific registers and RAM apply to the 28055 device only.
Figure 2-1. 28055 and 28054 Memory Map
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
9
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Data Space
0x00 0000
Prog Space
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0040
0x00 0400
0x00 0800
0x00 0D00
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
Peripheral Frame 0
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
Reserved
0x00 0E00
0x00 1400
Peripheral Frame 0
CLA Registers
0x00 1480
0x00 1500
0x00 1580
0x00 2000
0x00 6000
CLA-to-CPU Message RAM
CPU-to-CLA Message RAM
Peripheral Frame 0
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 1
(1K x 16, Protected)
0x00 6400
0x00 6A00
0x00 7000
0x00 8000
0x00 8800
0x00 8C00
0x00 9000
Peripheral Frame 3
(1.5K x 16, Protected)
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 1
(1.5K x 16, Protected)
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
L0 DPSARAM (2K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Data RAM 2)
L1 DPSARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Data RAM 0)
L2 DPSARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Data RAM 1)
L3 DPSARAM (4K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Prog RAM)
0x00 A000
0x00 F000
0x01 0000
Reserved
CLA Data ROM (4K x 16)
Reserved
0x3D 7800
0x3D 7A00
0x3D 7C00
User OTP, Zone 2 Passwords (512 x 16)
User OTP, Zone 1 Passwords (512 x 16)
Reserved
0x3D 7E00
0x3D 7FCB
Calibration Data
Configuration Data
Reserved
0x3D 7FF0
0x3F 0000
FLASH
(32K x 16, 5 Sectors, Dual Secure Zone + ECSL)
(Z1/Z2 User-Selectable Security Zone Per Sector)
0x3F 7FFF
0x3F 8000
Zone 1 Secure Copy Code ROM
(1K x 16)
0x3F 8400
Zone 2 Secure Copy Code ROM
(1K x 16)
0x3F 8800
0x3F D000
0x3F FFC0
Reserved
Boot ROM (12K x 16, 0-Wait)
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
A. CLA-specific registers and RAM apply to the 28053 device only.
Figure 2-2. 28053 and 28052 Memory Map
10
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Data Space
Prog Space
0x00 0000
0x00 0040
0x00 0400
0x00 0800
0x00 0D00
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
Peripheral Frame 0
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
Reserved
0x00 0E00
0x00 1400
Peripheral Frame 0
CLA Registers
0x00 1480
0x00 1500
0x00 1580
0x00 2000
0x00 6000
CLA-to-CPU Message RAM
CPU-to-CLA Message RAM
Peripheral Frame 0
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 1
(1K x 16, Protected)
0x00 6400
0x00 6A00
0x00 7000
0x00 8000
0x00 8800
0x00 8C00
0x00 9000
Peripheral Frame 3
(1.5K x 16, Protected)
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 1
(1.5K x 16, Protected)
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
Reserved
L1 DPSARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Data RAM 0)
L2 DPSARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Data RAM 1)
L3 DPSARAM (4K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL, CLA Prog RAM)
0x00 A000
0x00 F000
0x01 0000
Reserved
CLA Data ROM (4K x 16)
Reserved
0x3D 7800
0x3D 7A00
0x3D 7C00
User OTP, Zone 2 Passwords (512 x 16)
User OTP, Zone 1 Passwords (512 x 16)
Reserved
0x3D 7E00
0x3D 7FCB
Calibration Data
Configuration Data
Reserved
0x3D 7FF0
0x3F 0000
FLASH
(32K x 16, 5 Sectors, Dual Secure Zone + ECSL)
(Z1/Z2 User-Selectable Security Zone Per Sector)
0x3F 7FFF
0x3F 8000
Zone 1 Secure Copy Code ROM
(1K x 16)
0x3F 8400
Zone 2 Secure Copy Code ROM
(1K x 16)
0x3F 8800
0x3F D000
0x3F FFC0
Reserved
Boot ROM (12K x 16, 0-Wait)
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
Figure 2-3. 28051 Memory Map
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
11
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Data Space
0x00 0000
Prog Space
M0 Vector RAM (Enabled if VMAP = 0)
M0 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
0x00 0040
0x00 0400
0x00 0800
0x00 0D00
M1 SARAM (1K x 16, 0-Wait)
Peripheral Frame 0
PIE Vector - RAM
(256 x 16)
(Enabled if
VMAP = 1,
ENPIE = 1)
Reserved
0x00 0E00
0x00 1400
Peripheral Frame 0
Reserved
0x00 1580
0x00 2000
0x00 6000
Peripheral Frame 0
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 1
(1K x 16, Protected)
0x00 6400
0x00 6A00
0x00 7000
0x00 8000
0x00 8800
0x00 8C00
0x00 9000
Peripheral Frame 3
(1.5K x 16, Protected)
Reserved
Peripheral Frame 1
(1.5K x 16, Protected)
Peripheral Frame 2
(4K x 16, Protected)
L0 DPSARAM (2K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL)
L1 DPSARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL)
L2 DPSARAM (1K x 16)
(0-Wait, Z1 or Z2 Secure Zone + ECSL)
Reserved
0x00 A000
0x00 F000
0x01 0000
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0x3D 7800
0x3D 7A00
0x3D 7C00
User OTP, Zone 2 Passwords (512 x 16)
User OTP, Zone 1 Passwords (512 x 16)
Reserved
0x3D 7E00
0x3D 7FCB
Calibration Data
Configuration Data
Reserved
0x3D 7FF0
0x3F 4000
FLASH
(16K x 16, 3 Sectors, Dual Secure Zone + ECSL)
(Z1/Z2 User-Selectable Security Zone Per Sector)
0x3F 7FFF
0x3F 8000
Zone 1 Secure Copy Code ROM
(1K x 16)
0x3F 8400
Zone 2 Secure Copy Code ROM
(1K x 16)
0x3F 8800
0x3F D000
0x3F FFC0
Reserved
Boot ROM (12K x 16, 0-Wait)
Vector (32 Vectors, Enabled if VMAP = 1)
Figure 2-4. 28050 Memory Map
12
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 2-2. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F28055 and F28054
ADDRESS RANGE
0x3E 8000 – 0x3E 8FFF
0x3E 9000 – 0x3E 9FFF
0x3E A000 – 0x3E BFFF
0x3E C000 – 0x3E DFFF
0x3E E000 – 0x3E FFFF
0x3F 0000 – 0x3F 1FFF
0x3F 2000 – 0x3F 3FFF
0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 5FFF
0x3F 6000 – 0x3F 6FFF
0x3F 7000 – 0x3F 7FFF
PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE
Sector J (4K x 16)
Sector I (4K x 16)
Sector H (8K x 16)
Sector G (8K x 16)
Sector F (8K x 16)
Sector E (8K x 16)
Sector D (8K x 16)
Sector C (8K x 16)
Sector B (4K x 16)
Sector A (4K x 16)
Table 2-3. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F28053, F28052, and F28051
ADDRESS RANGE
0x3F 0000 – 0x3F 1FFF
0x3F 2000 – 0x3F 3FFF
0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 5FFF
0x3F 6000 – 0x3F 6FFF
0x3F 7000 – 0x3F 7FFF
PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE
Sector E (8K x 16)
Sector D (8K x 16)
Sector C (8K x 16)
Sector B (4K x 16)
Sector A (4K x 16)
Table 2-4. Addresses of Flash Sectors in F28050
ADDRESS RANGE
0x3F 4000 – 0x3F 5FFF
0x3F 6000 – 0x3F 6FFF
0x3F 7000 – 0x3F 7FFF
PROGRAM AND DATA SPACE
Sector C (8K x 16)
Sector B (4K x 16)
Sector A (4K x 16)
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
13
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Peripheral Frame 1, Peripheral Frame 2, and Peripheral Frame 3 are grouped together to enable these
blocks to be write/read peripheral block protected. The protected mode makes sure that all accesses to
these blocks happen as written. Because of the pipeline, a write immediately followed by a read to
different memory locations will appear in reverse order on the memory bus of the CPU. This action can
cause problems in certain peripheral applications where the user expected the write to occur first (as
written). The CPU supports a block protection mode where a region of memory can be protected so that
operations occur as written (the penalty is extra cycles are added to align the operations). This mode is
programmable, and by default, it protects the selected zones.
The wait-states for the various spaces in the memory map area are listed in Table 2-5.
Table 2-5. Wait-States
AREA
WAIT-STATES (CPU)
0-wait
COMMENTS
M0 and M1 SARAMs
Peripheral Frame 0
Peripheral Frame 1
Fixed
0-wait
0-wait (writes)
2-wait (reads)
Cycles can be extended by peripheral generated ready.
Back-to-back write operations to Peripheral Frame 1 registers will incur
a 1-cycle stall (1-cycle delay).
Peripheral Frame 2
Peripheral Frame 3
0-wait (writes)
2-wait (reads)
Fixed. Cycles cannot be extended by the peripheral.
0-wait (writes)
Assumes no conflict between CPU and CLA.
Cycles can be extended by peripheral-generated ready.
Assumes no CPU conflicts
2-wait (reads)
L0 SARAM
L1 SARAM
L2 SARAM
L3 SARAM
OTP
0-wait data and program
0-wait data and program
0-wait data and program
0-wait data and program
Programmable
Assumes no CPU conflicts
Assumes no CPU conflicts
Assumes no CPU conflicts
Programmed via the Flash registers.
1-wait is minimum number of wait states allowed.
Programmed via the Flash registers.
1-wait minimum
FLASH
Programmable
0-wait Paged min
1-wait Random min
Random ≥ Paged
FLASH Password
Boot-ROM
16-wait fixed
0-wait
Wait states of password locations are fixed.
14
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
2.3 Brief Descriptions
2.3.1 CPU
The 2805x (C28x) family is a member of the TMS320C2000™ microcontroller (MCU) platform. The C28x-
based controllers have the same 32-bit fixed-point architecture as existing C28x MCUs. Each C28x-based
controller, including the 2805x device, is a very efficient C/C++ engine, enabling users to develop not only
their system control software in a high-level language, but also enabling development of math algorithms
using C/C++. The device is as efficient at MCU math tasks as it is at system control tasks. This efficiency
removes the need for a second processor in many systems. The 32 x 32-bit MAC 64-bit processing
capabilities enable the controller to handle higher numerical resolution problems efficiently. Add to this
feature the fast interrupt response with automatic context save of critical registers, resulting in a device
that is capable of servicing many asynchronous events with minimal latency. The device has an 8-level-
deep protected pipeline with pipelined memory accesses. This pipelining enables the device to execute at
high speeds without resorting to expensive high-speed memories. Special branch-look-ahead hardware
minimizes the latency for conditional discontinuities. Special store conditional operations further improve
performance.
2.3.2 Control Law Accelerator (CLA)
The C28x control law accelerator is a single-precision (32-bit) floating-point unit that extends the
capabilities of the C28x CPU by adding parallel processing. The CLA is an independent processor with its
own bus structure, fetch mechanism, and pipeline. Eight individual CLA tasks, or routines, can be
specified. Each task is started by software or a peripheral such as the ADC, ePWM, eCAP, eQEP, or CPU
Timer 0. The CLA executes one task at a time to completion. When a task completes the main CPU is
notified by an interrupt to the PIE and the CLA automatically begins the next highest-priority pending task.
The CLA can directly access the ADC Result registers, ePWM, eCAP, eQEP, and the Comparator and
DAC registers. Dedicated message RAMs provide a method to pass additional data between the main
CPU and the CLA.
2.3.3 Memory Bus (Harvard Bus Architecture)
As with many MCU-type devices, multiple busses are used to move data between the memories and
peripherals and the CPU. The memory bus architecture contains a program read bus, data read bus, and
data write bus. The program read bus consists of 22 address lines and 32 data lines. The data read and
write busses consist of 32 address lines and 32 data lines each. The 32-bit-wide data busses enable
single cycle 32-bit operations. The multiple bus architecture, commonly termed Harvard Bus, enables the
C28x to fetch an instruction, read a data value and write a data value in a single cycle. All peripherals and
memories attached to the memory bus prioritize memory accesses. Generally, the priority of memory bus
accesses can be summarized as follows:
Highest:
Data Writes
(Simultaneous data and program writes cannot occur on the
memory bus.)
Program Writes
(Simultaneous data and program writes cannot occur on the
memory bus.)
Data Reads
Program Reads
(Simultaneous program reads and fetches cannot occur on the
memory bus.)
Lowest:
Fetches
(Simultaneous program reads and fetches cannot occur on the
memory bus.)
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
15
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.3.4 Peripheral Bus
To enable migration of peripherals between various Texas Instruments (TI) MCU family of devices, the
devices adopt a peripheral bus standard for peripheral interconnect. The peripheral bus bridge multiplexes
the various busses that make up the processor Memory Bus into a single bus consisting of 16 address
lines and 16 or 32 data lines and associated control signals. Three versions of the peripheral bus are
supported. One version supports only 16-bit accesses (called peripheral frame 2). Another version
supports both 16- and 32-bit accesses (called peripheral frame 1). The third version supports CLA access
and both 16- and 32-bit accesses (called peripheral frame 3).
2.3.5 Real-Time JTAG and Analysis
(1)
The devices implement the standard IEEE 1149.1 JTAG
interface for in-circuit based debug.
Additionally, the devices support real-time mode of operation allowing modification of the contents of
memory, peripheral, and register locations while the processor is running and executing code and
servicing interrupts. The user can also single step through non-time-critical code while enabling time-
critical interrupts to be serviced without interference. The device implements the real-time mode in
hardware within the CPU. This feature is unique to the 28x family of devices, and requires no software
monitor. Additionally, special analysis hardware is provided that allows setting of hardware breakpoint or
data/address watch-points and generating various user-selectable break events when a match occurs.
These devices do not support boundary scan; however, IDCODE and BYPASS features are available if
the following considerations are taken into account. The IDCODE does not come by default. The user
needs to go through a sequence of SHIFT IR and SHIFT DR state of JTAG to get the IDCODE. For
BYPASS instruction, the first shifted DR value would be 1.
2.3.6 Flash
The F28055 and F28054 devices contain 64K x 16 of embedded flash memory, segregated into six
8K x 16 sectors and four 4K x 16 sectors. The F28053, F28052, and F28051 devices contain 32K x 16 of
embedded flash memory, segregated into three 8K x 16 sectors and two 4K x 16 sectors. The F28050
device contains 16K x 16 of embedded flash memory, segregated into one 8K x 16 sector and two 4K x
16 sectors. The devices also contain a single 1K x 16 of OTP memory at address range 0x3D 7800 –
0x3D 7BFF. The user can individually erase, program, and validate a flash sector while leaving other
sectors untouched. However, it is not possible to use one sector of the flash or the OTP to execute flash
algorithms that erase or program other sectors. Special memory pipelining is provided to enable the flash
module to achieve higher performance. The flash/OTP is mapped to both program and data space;
therefore, the flash/OTP can be used to execute code or store data information.
NOTE
The Flash and OTP wait-states can be configured by the application. This feature allows
applications running at slower frequencies to configure the flash to use fewer wait-states.
Flash effective performance can be improved by enabling the flash pipeline mode in the
Flash options register. With this mode enabled, effective performance of linear code
execution will be much faster than the raw performance indicated by the wait-state
configuration alone. The exact performance gain when using the Flash pipeline mode is
application-dependent.
For more information on the Flash options, Flash wait-state, and OTP wait-state registers,
see the System Control and Interrupts chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical
Reference Manual (literature number SPRUHE5).
(1) IEEE Standard 1149.1-1990 Standard Test Access Port and Boundary Scan Architecture
16
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
2.3.7 M0, M1 SARAMs
All devices contain these two blocks of single access memory, each 1K x 16 in size. The stack pointer
points to the beginning of block M1 on reset. The M0 and M1 blocks, like all other memory blocks on C28x
devices, are mapped to both program and data space. Hence, the user can use M0 and M1 to execute
code or for data variables. The partitioning is performed within the linker. The C28x device presents a
unified memory map to the programmer, which makes for easier programming in high-level languages.
2.3.8 L0 SARAM, and L1, L2, and L3 DPSARAMs
The device contains up to 8K x 16 of single-access RAM. To ascertain the exact size for a given device,
see the device-specific memory map figures in Section 2.2. This block is mapped to both program and
data space. Block L0 is 2K in size and is dual mapped to both program and data space. Blocks L1 and L2
are both 1K in size, and together with L0, are shared with the CLA which can ultilize these blocks for its
data space. Block L3 is 4K in size and is shared with the CLA which can ultilize this block for its program
space. DPSARAM refers to the dual-port configuration of these blocks.
2.3.9 Boot ROM
The Boot ROM is factory-programmed with boot-loading software. Boot-mode signals are provided to tell
the bootloader software what boot mode to use on power up. The user can select to boot normally or to
download new software from an external connection or to select boot software that is programmed in the
internal Flash/ROM. The Boot ROM also contains standard tables, such as SIN/COS waveforms, for use
in math-related algorithms.
Table 2-6. Boot Mode Selection
GPIO34/COMP2OUT/
MODE
GPIO37/TDO
TRST
MODE
COMP3OUT
3
2
1
1
0
0
x
1
0
1
0
x
0
0
0
0
1
GetMode
Wait (see Section 2.3.10 for description)
1
SCI
0
Parallel IO
Emulation Boot
EMU
2.3.9.1 Emulation Boot
When the emulator is connected, the GPIO37/TDO pin cannot be used for boot mode selection. In this
case, the boot ROM detects that an emulator is connected and uses the contents of two reserved SARAM
locations in the PIE vector table to determine the boot mode. If the content of either location is invalid,
then the Wait boot option is used. All boot mode options can be accessed in emulation boot.
2.3.9.2 GetMode
The default behavior of the GetMode option is to boot to flash. This behavior can be changed to another
boot option by programming two locations in the OTP. If the content of either OTP location is invalid, then
boot to flash is used. One of the following loaders can be specified: SCI, SPI, I2C, CAN, or OTP.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
17
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.3.9.3 Peripheral Pins Used by the Bootloader
Table 2-7 shows which GPIO pins are used by each peripheral bootloader. Refer to the GPIO mux table
to see if these conflict with any of the peripherals you would like to use in your application.
Table 2-7. Peripheral Bootload Pins
BOOTLOADER
PERIPHERAL LOADER PINS
SCIRXDA (GPIO28)
SCI
SCITXDA (GPIO29)
Parallel Boot
SPI
Data (GPIO31,30,5:0)
28x Control (GPIO26)
Host Control (GPIO27)
SPISIMOA (GPIO16)
SPISOMIA (GPIO17)
SPICLKA (GPIO18)
SPISTEA (GPIO19)
I2C
SDAA (GPIO28)
SCLA (GPIO29)
CAN
CANRXA (GPIO30)
CANTXA (GPIO31)
2.3.10 Security
The TMS320F2805x device supports high levels of security with a dual-zone (Z1/Z2) feature to protect
user's firmware from being reverse-engineered. The dual-zone feature enables the user to co-develop
application software with a third-party or sub-contractor by preventing visibility into each other's software
IP. The security features a 128-bit password (hardcoded for 16 wait states) for each zone, which the user
programs into the USER-OTP. Each zone has its own dedicated USER-OTP, which needs to be
programmed by the user with the required security settings, including the 128-bit password. Since OTP
cannot be erased, in order to provide the user with the flexibility of changing security-related settings and
passwords multiple times, a 32-bit link pointer is stored at the beginning of each USER-OTP. Considering
the fact that user can only flip a ‘1’ in USER-OTP to ‘0’, the most significant bit position in the link pointer,
programmed as 0, defines the USER-OTP region (zone-select) for each zone in which security-related
settings and passwords are stored.
Table 2-8. Location of Zone-Select Block Based on Link Pointer
Zx LINK POINTER VALUE
ADDRESS OFFSET FOR ZONE-SELECT
32’bxx111111111111111111111111111111
32’bxx111111111111111111111111111110
32’bxx11111111111111111111111111110x
32’bxx1111111111111111111111111110xx
32’bxx111111111111111111111111110xxx
32’bxx11111111111111111111111110xxxx
32’bxx1111111111111111111111110xxxxx
32’bxx111111111111111111111110xxxxxx
32’bxx11111111111111111111110xxxxxxx
32’bxx1111111111111111111110xxxxxxxx
32’bxx111111111111111111110xxxxxxxxx
32’bxx11111111111111111110xxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx1111111111111111110xxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx111111111111111110xxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx11111111111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxx
0x10
0x20
0x30
0x40
0x50
0x60
0x70
0x80
0x90
0xa0
0xb0
0xc0
0xd0
0xe0
0xf0
18
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 2-8. Location of Zone-Select Block Based on Link Pointer (continued)
Zx LINK POINTER VALUE
ADDRESS OFFSET FOR ZONE-SELECT
32’bxx1111111111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx111111111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx11111111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx1111111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx111111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx11111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx1111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx111111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx11111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx1111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx111110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx11110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx1110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx110xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx10xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
32’bxx0xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
0x100
0x110
0x120
0x130
0x140
0x150
0x160
0x170
0x180
0x190
0x1a0
0x1b0
0x1c0
0x1d0
0x1e0
0x1f0
Table 2-9. Zone-Select Block Organization in USER-OTP
16-BIT ADDRESS OFFSET
(WITH RESPECT TO OFFSET OF ZONE-SELECT)
CONTENT
0x0
0x1
0x2
0x3
0x4
0x5
0x6
0x7
0x8
0x9
0xa
0xb
0xc
0xd
0xe
0xf
Zx-EXEONLYRAM
Zx-EXEONLYSECT
Zx-GRABRAM
Zx-GRABSECT
Zx-CSMPSWD0
Zx-CSMPSWD1
Zx-CSMPSWD2
Zx-CSMPSWD3
The Dual Code Security Module (DCSM) is used to protect the Flash/OTP/Lx SARAM blocks/CLA/Secure
ROM content. Individual flash sectors and SARAM blocks can be attached to any of the secure zone at
start-up time. Secure ROM and the CLA are always attached to Z1. Resources attached to (owned by)
one zone do not have any access to code running in the other zone when it is secured. Individual flash
sectors, as well as SARAM blocks, can be further protected by enabling the EXEONLY protection.
EXEONLY flash sectors or SARAM blocks do not have READ/WRITE access. Only code execution is
allowed from such memory blocks.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
19
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
The security feature prevents unauthorized users from examining memory contents via the JTAG port,
executing code from external memory, or trying to boot load an undesirable software that would export the
secure memory contents. To enable access to the secure blocks of a particular zone, the user must write
a 128-bit value in the zone’s CSMKEY registers that matches the values stored in the password locations
in USER-OTP. If the 128 bits of the password locations in USER-OTP of a particular zone are all ones
(un-programmed), then the security for that zone gets UNLOCKED as soon as a dummy read is done to
the password locations in USER-OTP (the value in the CSMKEY register becomes "Don’t care" in this
case).
In addition to the DCSM, the Emulation Code Security Logic (ECSL) has been implemented for each zone
to prevent unauthorized users from stepping through secure code. A halt inside secure code will trip the
ECSL and break the emulation connection. To allow emulation of secure code while maintaining DCSM
protection against secure memory reads, the user must write the lower 64 bits of the USER-OTP
password into the zone's CSMKEY register to disable the ECSL. Note that dummy reads of all 128 bits of
the password for that particular zone in USER-OTP must still be performed. If the lower 64 bits of the
password locations of a particular zone are all zeros, then the ECSL for that zone gets disabled as soon
as a dummy read is done to the password locations in USER-OTP (the value in the CSMKEY register
becomes "Don’t care" in this case).
When initially debugging a device with the password locations in OTP (that is, secured), the CPU will start
running and may execute an instruction that performs an access to ECSL-protected area. If the CPU
execution is halted when the program counter belongs to the secure code region, the ECSL will trip and
cause the emulator connection to be cut. The solution is to use the Wait boot option. The Wait boot option
will sit in a loop around a software breakpoint to allow an emulator to be connected without tripping
security. The user can then exit this mode once the emulator is connected by using one of the emulation
boot options as described in the Boot ROM chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical Reference
Manual (literature number SPRUHE5). 2805x devices do not support hardware wait-in-reset mode.
To prevent reverse-engineering of the code in secure zone, unauthorized users are prevented from
looking at the CPU registers in the CCS Expressions Window. The values in the Expressions Window for
all of these registers, except for PC and some status bits, display false values when code is running from
a secure zone. This feature gets disabled if the zone is unlocked.
NOTE
•
The USER-OTP contains security-related settings for their respective zone. Execution is
not allowed from the USER-OTP; therefore, the user should not keep any code/data in
this region.
•
•
The 128-bit password must not be programmed to zeros. Doing so would permanently
lock the device.
The user must try not to write into the CPU registers through the debugger watch window
when code is running/halted from/inside secure zone. This may corrupt the execution of
the actual program.
20
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Disclaimer
Dual Code Security Module Disclaimer
THE DUAL CODE SECURITY MODULE (DCSM) INCLUDED ON THIS DEVICE WAS
DESIGNED TO PASSWORD PROTECT THE DATA STORED IN THE ASSOCIATED
MEMORY (EITHER ROM OR FLASH) AND IS WARRANTED BY TEXAS INSTRUMENTS
(TI), IN ACCORDANCE WITH ITS STANDARD TERMS AND CONDITIONS, TO CONFORM
TO TI'S PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE WARRANTY PERIOD APPLICABLE
FOR THIS DEVICE.
TI DOES NOT, HOWEVER, WARRANT OR REPRESENT THAT THE DCSM CANNOT BE
COMPROMISED OR BREACHED OR THAT THE DATA STORED IN THE ASSOCIATED
MEMORY CANNOT BE ACCESSED THROUGH OTHER MEANS. MOREOVER, EXCEPT
AS SET FORTH ABOVE, TI MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS
CONCERNING THE DCSM OR OPERATION OF THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL TI BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED, ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE DCSM OR THIS DEVICE, WHETHER OR NOT TI HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. EXCLUDED DAMAGES INCLUDE,
BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF USE OR
INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR OTHER ECONOMIC LOSS.
2.3.11 Peripheral Interrupt Expansion (PIE) Block
The PIE block serves to multiplex numerous interrupt sources into a smaller set of interrupt inputs. The
PIE block can support up to 96 peripheral interrupts. On the F2805x devices, 54 of the possible 96
interrupts are used by peripherals. The 96 interrupts are grouped into blocks of 8 and each group is fed
into 1 of 12 CPU interrupt lines (INT1 to INT12). Each of the 96 interrupts is supported by its own vector
stored in a dedicated RAM block that can be overwritten by the user. The vector is automatically fetched
by the CPU on servicing the interrupt. Eight CPU clock cycles are needed to fetch the vector and save
critical CPU registers. Hence the CPU can quickly respond to interrupt events. Prioritization of interrupts is
controlled in hardware and software. Each individual interrupt can be enabled or disabled within the PIE
block.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
21
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.3.12 External Interrupts (XINT1–XINT3)
The devices support three masked external interrupts (XINT1–XINT3). Each of the interrupts can be
selected for negative, positive, or both negative and positive edge triggering and can also be enabled or
disabled. These interrupts also contain a 16-bit free running up counter, which is reset to zero when a
valid interrupt edge is detected. This counter can be used to accurately time stamp the interrupt. There are
no dedicated pins for the external interrupts. XINT1, XINT2, and XINT3 interrupts can accept inputs from
GPIO0–GPIO31 pins.
2.3.13 Internal Zero-Pin Oscillators, Oscillator, and PLL
The device can be clocked by either of the two internal zero-pin oscillators, an external oscillator, or by a
crystal attached to the on-chip oscillator circuit. A PLL is provided supporting up to 12 input-clock-scaling
ratios. The PLL ratios can be changed on-the-fly in software, enabling the user to scale back on operating
frequency if lower power operation is desired. Refer to Section 5.2 for timing details. The PLL block can
be set in bypass mode.
2.3.14 Watchdog
Each device contains two watchdogs: CPU-Watchdog that monitors the core and NMI-Watchdog that is a
missing clock-detect circuit. The user software must regularly reset the CPU-watchdog counter within a
certain time frame; otherwise, the CPU-watchdog generates a reset to the processor. The CPU-watchdog
can be disabled if necessary. The NMI-Watchdog engages only in case of a clock failure and can either
generate an interrupt or a device reset.
2.3.15 Peripheral Clocking
The clocks to each individual peripheral can be enabled or disabled to reduce power consumption when a
peripheral is not in use. Additionally, the system clock to the serial ports (except I2C) can be scaled
relative to the CPU clock.
2.3.16 Low-power Modes
The devices are full-static CMOS devices. Three low-power modes are provided:
IDLE:
Place CPU in low-power mode. Peripheral clocks may be turned off selectively and
only those peripherals that need to function during IDLE are left operating. An
enabled interrupt from an active peripheral or the watchdog timer will wake the
processor from IDLE mode.
STANDBY: Turns off clock to CPU and peripherals. This mode leaves the oscillator and PLL
functional. An external interrupt event will wake the processor and the peripherals.
Execution begins on the next valid cycle after detection of the interrupt event
HALT:
This mode basically shuts down the device and places the device in the lowest
possible power consumption mode. If the internal zero-pin oscillators are used as the
clock source, the HALT mode turns them off, by default. To keep these oscillators
from shutting down, the INTOSCnHALTI bits in CLKCTL register may be used. The
zero-pin oscillators may thus be used to clock the CPU-watchdog in this mode. If the
on-chip crystal oscillator is used as the clock source, the crystal oscillator is shut
down in this mode. A reset or an external signal (through a GPIO pin) or the CPU-
watchdog can wake the device from this mode.
The CPU clock (OSCCLK) and WDCLK should be from the same clock source before attempting to put
the device into HALT or STANDBY.
22
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
2.3.17 Peripheral Frames 0, 1, 2, 3 (PFn)
The device segregates peripherals into four sections. The mapping of peripherals is as follows:
PF0:
PIE:
PIE Interrupt Enable and Control Registers Plus PIE Vector Table
Flash Waitstate Registers
Flash:
Timers:
DCSM:
ADC:
CLA
CPU-Timers 0, 1, 2 Registers
Dual Zone Security Module Registers
ADC Result Registers
Control Law Accelrator Registers and Message RAMs
GPIO MUX Configuration and Control Registers
Enhanced Control Area Network Configuration and Control Registers
Enhanced Capture Module and Registers
PF1:
PF2:
GPIO:
eCAN:
eCAP:
eQEP:
SYS:
Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Module and Registers
System Control Registers
SCI:
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Control and RX/TX Registers
Serial Port Interface (SPI) Control and RX/TX Registers
ADC Status, Control, and Configuration Registers
Inter-Integrated Circuit Module and Registers
External Interrupt Registers
SPI:
ADC:
I2C:
XINT:
ePWM:
PF3:
Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator Module and Registers
Comparators and Comparator Modules
Digital Filters:
eCAP:
eQEP:
ADC:
ADC:
DAC:
Enhanced Capture Module and Registers
Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Module and Registers
ADC Status, Control, and Configuration Registers
ADC Result Registers
DAC Control Registers
2.3.18 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Multiplexer
Most of the peripheral signals are multiplexed with general-purpose input/output (GPIO) signals. This
muxing enables the user to use a pin as GPIO if the peripheral signal or function is not used. On reset,
GPIO pins are configured as inputs. The user can individually program each pin for GPIO mode or
peripheral signal mode. For specific inputs, the user can also select the number of input qualification
cycles. This selection is to filter unwanted noise glitches. The GPIO signals can also be used to bring the
device out of specific low-power modes.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
23
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.3.19 32-Bit CPU-Timers (0, 1, 2)
CPU-Timers 0, 1, and 2 are identical 32-bit timers with presettable periods and with 16-bit clock
prescaling. The timers have a 32-bit count-down register, which generates an interrupt when the counter
reaches zero. The counter is decremented at the CPU clock speed divided by the prescale value setting.
When the counter reaches zero, the counter is automatically reloaded with a 32-bit period value.
CPU-Timer 0 is for general use and is connected to the PIE block. CPU-Timer 1 is also for general use
and can be connected to INT13 of the CPU. CPU-Timer 2 is reserved for DSP/BIOS. CPU-Timer 2 is
connected to INT14 of the CPU. If DSP/BIOS is not being used, CPU-Timer 2 is available for general use.
CPU-Timer 2 can be clocked by any one of the following:
•
•
•
•
SYSCLKOUT (default)
Internal zero-pin oscillator 1 (INTOSC1)
Internal zero-pin oscillator 2 (INTSOC2)
External clock source
2.3.20 Control Peripherals
The devices support the following peripherals that are used for embedded control and communication:
ePWM:
The enhanced PWM peripheral supports independent/complementary
PWM generation, adjustable dead-band generation for leading/trailing
edges, latched/cycle-by-cycle trip mechanism. The type 1 module found on
2805x devices also supports increased dead-band resolution, enhanced
SOC and interrupt generation, and advanced triggering including trip
functions based on comparator outputs.
eCAP:
eQEP:
The enhanced capture peripheral uses a 32-bit time base and registers up
to four programmable events in continuous/one-shot capture modes.
This peripheral can also be configured to generate an auxiliary PWM
signal.
The enhanced QEP peripheral uses a 32-bit position counter, supports
low-speed measurement using capture unit and high-speed measurement
using a 32-bit unit timer. This peripheral has a watchdog timer to detect
motor stall and input error detection logic to identify simultaneous edge
transition in QEP signals.
ADC:
The ADC block is a 12-bit converter. The ADC has up to 16 single-ended
channels pinned out, depending on the device. The ADC also contains two
sample-and-hold units for simultaneous sampling.
Comparator and
Digital Filter
Subsystems:
Each comparator block consists of one analog comparator along with an
internal 6-bit reference for supplying one input of the comparator. The
comparator output signal filtering is achieved using the Digital Filter
present on each input line and qualifies the output of the COMP/DAC
subsystem. The filtered or unfiltered output of the COMP/DAC subsystem
can be configured to be an input to the Digital Compare submodule of the
ePWM peripheral. There is also a configurable option to bring the output of
the COMP/DAC subsystem onto the GPIO’s.
24
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
2.3.21 Serial Port Peripherals
The devices support the following serial communication peripherals:
SPI:
The SPI is a high-speed, synchronous serial I/O port that allows a serial bit stream
of programmed length (one to sixteen bits) to be shifted into and out of the device
at a programmable bit-transfer rate. Normally, the SPI is used for communications
between the MCU and external peripherals or another processor. Typical
applications include external I/O or peripheral expansion through devices such as
shift registers, display drivers, and ADCs. Multi-device communications are
supported by the master/slave operation of the SPI. The SPI contains a 4-level
receive and transmit FIFO for reducing interrupt servicing overhead.
SCI:
I2C:
The serial communications interface is a two-wire asynchronous serial port,
commonly known as UART. The SCI contains a 4-level receive and transmit FIFO
for reducing interrupt servicing overhead.
The inter-integrated circuit (I2C) module provides an interface between an MCU
and other devices compliant with Philips Semiconductors Inter-IC bus (I2C-bus)
specification version 2.1 and connected by way of an I2C-bus. External
components attached to this 2-wire serial bus can transmit and receive up to 8-bit
data to and from the MCU through the I2C module. The I2C contains a 4-level
receive and transmit FIFO for reducing interrupt servicing overhead.
eCAN:
The eCAN is the enhanced version of the CAN peripheral. The eCAN supports 32
mailboxes, time stamping of messages, and is CAN 2.0B-compliant.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
25
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.4 Register Map
The devices contain four peripheral register spaces. The spaces are categorized as follows:
Peripheral Frame 0: These are peripherals that are mapped directly to the CPU memory bus.
See Table 2-10.
Peripheral Frame 1: These are peripherals that are mapped to the 32-bit peripheral bus. See
Table 2-11.
Peripheral Frame 2: These are peripherals that are mapped to the 16-bit peripheral bus. See
Table 2-12.
Peripheral Frame 3: These are peripherals that are mapped to CLA in addition to their respective
Peripheral Frame. See Table 2-13.
Table 2-10. Peripheral Frame 0 Registers(1)
NAME
Device Emulation Registers
System Power Control Registers
FLASH Registers(3)
ADDRESS RANGE
0x00 0880 – 0x00 0984
0x00 0985 – 0x00 0987
0x00 0A80 – 0x00 0ADF
0x00 0B00 – 0x00 0B0F
0x00 0B80 – 0x00 0BBF
0x00 0BC0 – 0x00 0BEF
0x00 0C00 – 0x00 0C3F
SIZE (×16)
EALLOW PROTECTED(2)
261
3
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
96
16
64
48
64
ADC registers (0 wait read only)
DCSM Zone 1 Registers
Yes
Yes
No
DCSM Zone 2 Registers
CPU-TIMER0, CPU-TIMER1, CPU-TIMER2
Registers
PIE Registers
0x00 0CE0 – 0x00 0CFF
0x00 0D00 – 0x00 0DFF
0x00 1400 – 0x00 147F
0x00 1480 – 0x00 14FF
0x00 1500 – 0x00 157F
32
No
No
PIE Vector Table
256
128
128
128
CLA Registers
Yes
NA
NA
CLA to CPU Message RAM (CPU writes ignored)
CPU to CLA Message RAM (CLA writes ignored)
(1) Registers in Frame 0 support 16-bit and 32-bit accesses.
(2) If registers are EALLOW protected, then writes cannot be performed until the EALLOW instruction is executed. The EDIS instruction
disables writes to prevent stray code or pointers from corrupting register contents.
(3) The Flash Registers are also protected by the Dual Code Security Module (DCSM).
Table 2-11. Peripheral Frame 1 Registers
NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
0x00 6000 – 0x00 61FF
0x00 6A00 – 0x00 6A1F
0x00 6B00 – 0x00 6B3F
0x00 6F80 – 0x00 6FFF
SIZE (×16)
EALLOW PROTECTED
(1)
eCAN-A Registers
eCAP1 Registers
eQEP1 Registers
GPIO Registers
512
32
No
(1)
64
(1)
128
(1) Some registers are EALLOW protected. See the module reference guide for more information.
26
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 2-12. Peripheral Frame 2 Registers
NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
0x00 7010 – 0x00 702F
0x00 7040 – 0x00 704F
0x00 7050 – 0x00 705F
0x00 7060 – 0x00 706F
0x00 7070 – 0x00 707F
0x00 7100 – 0x00 717F
0x00 7900 – 0x00 793F
SIZE (×16)
EALLOW PROTECTED
System Control Registers
SPI-A Registers
32
16
Yes
No
SCI-A Registers
16
No
NMI Watchdog Interrupt Registers
External Interrupt Registers
ADC Registers
16
Yes
16
Yes
(1)
128
64
(1)
I2C-A Registers
(1) Some registers are EALLOW protected. See the module reference guide for more information.
Table 2-13. Peripheral Frame 3 Registers
NAME
ADDRESS RANGE
SIZE (×16)
EALLOW PROTECTED
ADC registers
0x00 0B00 – 0x00 0B0F
16
No
(0 wait read only)
DAC Control Registers
0x00 6400 – 0x00 640F
0x00 6410 – 0x00 641F
16
16
Yes
Yes
DAC, PGA, Comparator, and Filter Enable
Registers
SWITCH Registers
Digital Filter and Comparator Control Registers
LOCK Registers
0x00 6420 – 0x00 642F
0x00 6430 – 0x00 647F
0x00 64F0 – 0x00 64FF
0x00 6800 – 0x00 683F
0x00 6840 – 0x00 687F
0x00 6880 – 0x00 68BF
0x00 68C0 – 0x00 68FF
0x00 6900 – 0x00 693F
0x00 6940 – 0x00 697F
0x00 6980 – 0x00 69BF
0x00 6A00 – 0x00 6A1F
0x00 6B00 – 0x00 6B3F
16
80
16
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
32
64
Yes
Yes
Yes
(1)
ePWM1 registers
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
ePWM2 registers
ePWM3 registers
ePWM4 registers
ePWM5 registers
ePWM6 registers
ePWM7 registers
eCAP1 Registers
No
(1)
eQEP1 Registers
(1) Some registers are EALLOW protected. See the module reference guide for more information.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
27
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.5 Device Emulation Registers
These registers are used to control the protection mode of the C28x CPU and to monitor some critical
device signals. The registers are defined in Table 2-14.
Table 2-14. Device Emulation Registers
ADDRESS
RANGE
EALLOW
PROTECTED
NAME
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION
Device Configuration Register
0x0880 –
0x0881
DEVICECNF
PARTID
2
1
Yes
0x0882
PARTID Register
TMS320F28055
TMS320F28054
TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052
TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
0x0105
0x0104
0x0103
0x0102
0x0101
0x0100
No
REVID
DC1
0x0883
1
2
Revision ID
Register
0x0000 - Silicon Rev. 0 - TMX
No
0x0886 –
0x0887
Device Capability Register 1.
The Device Capability Register is predefined by the part and
can be used to verify features. If any bit is “zero” in this
register, the module is not present. See Table 2-15.
Yes
DC2
DC3
0x0888 –
0x0889
2
2
Device Capability Register 2.
The Device Capability Register is predefined by the part and
can be used to verify features. If any bit is “zero” in this
register, the module is not present. See Table 2-16.
Yes
Yes
0x088A –
0x088B
Device Capability Register 3.
The Device Capability Register is predefined by the part and
can be used to verify features. If any bit is “zero” in this
register, the module is not present. See Table 2-17.
Table 2-15. Device Capability Register 1 (DC1) Field Descriptions(1)
BIT
FIELD
RSVD
TYPE
R = 0
R
DESCRIPTION
31–30
29–22
Reserved
PARTNO
These 8 bits set the PARTNO field value in the PARTID register for the device. They
are readable in the PARTID[7:0] register bits.
21–14
RSVD
CLA
RSVD
L3
R = 0
R
Reserved
13
12–7
6
CLA is present when this bit is set.
Reserved
R = 0
R
L3 is present when this bit is set.
L2 is present when this bit is set.
L1 is present when this bit is set.
L0 is present when this bit is set.
Reserved
5
L2
R
4
L1
R
3
L0
R
2
RSVD
RSVD
R = 0
R = 0
1–0
Reserved
(1) All reserved bits should not be written to but if any use case demands that they must be written to, then software must write the same
value that is read back from the reserved bits. These bits are reserved for future enhancements.
28
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 2-16. Device Capability Register 2 (DC2) Field Descriptions(1)
BIT
31–28
27
FIELD
RSVD
TYPE
R = 0
R
DESCRIPTION
Reserved
eCAN-A
RSVD
EQEP-1
RSVD
ECAP-1
RSVD
I2C-A
eCAN-A is present when this bit is set.
Reserved
26–17
16
R = 0
R
eQEP-1 is present when this bit is set.
Reserved
15–13
12
R = 0
R
eCAP-1 is present when this bit is set.
Reserved
11–9
8
R = 0
R
I2C-A is present when this bit is set.
Reserved
7–5
4
RSVD
SPI-A
R = 0
R
SPI-A is present when this bit is set.
Reserved
3
RSVD
SCI-C
SCI-B
SCI-A
R = 0
R
2
SCI-C is present when this bit is set.
SCI-B is present when this bit is set.
SCI-A is present when this bit is set.
1
R
0
R
(1) All reserved bits should not be written to but if any use case demands that they must be written to, then software must write the same
value that is read back from the reserved bits. These bits are reserved for future enhancements.
Table 2-17. Device Capability Register 3 (DC3) Field Descriptions(1)
BIT
31–20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12–8
7
FIELD
RSVD
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
R = 0
R
Reserved
CTRIPFIL7
CTRIPFIL6
CTRIPFIL5
CTRIPFIL4
CTRIPFIL3
CTRIPFIL2
CTRIPFIL1
RSVD
CTRIPFIL7(B7) is present when this bit is set.
CTRIPFIL6(B6) is present when this bit is set.
CTRIPFIL5(B4) is present when this bit is set.
CTRIPFIL4(A6) is present when this bit is set.
CTRIPFIL3(B1) is present when this bit is set.
CTRIPFIL2(A3) is present when this bit is set.
CTRIPFIL1(A1) is present when this bit is set.
Reserved
R
R
R
R
R
R
R = 0
R = 0
R
RSVD
Reserved
6
ePWM7
ePWM7 is present when this bit is set.
ePWM6 is present when this bit is set.
ePWM5 is present when this bit is set.
ePWM4 is present when this bit is set.
ePWM3 is present when this bit is set.
ePWM2 is present when this bit is set.
ePWM1 is present when this bit is set.
5
ePWM6
R
4
ePWM5
R
3
ePWM4
R
2
ePWM3
R
1
ePWM2
R
0
ePWM1
R
(1) All reserved bits should not be written to but if any use case demands that they must be written to, then software must write the same
value that is read back from the reserved bits. These bits are reserved for future enhancements.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
29
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.6 VREG, BOR, POR
Although the core and I/O circuitry operate on two different voltages, these devices have an on-chip
voltage regulator (VREG) to generate the VDD voltage from the VDDIO supply. This feature eliminates the
cost and space of a second external regulator on an application board. Additionally, internal power-on
reset (POR) and brown-out reset (BOR) circuits monitor both the VDD and VDDIO rails during power-up and
run mode.
2.6.1 On-chip Voltage Regulator (VREG)
A linear regulator generates the core voltage (VDD) from the VDDIO supply. Therefore, although capacitors
are required on each VDD pin to stabilize the generated voltage, power need not be supplied to these pins
to operate the device. Conversely, the VREG can be disabled, should power or redundancy be the
primary concern of the application.
2.6.1.1 Using the On-chip VREG
To utilize the on-chip VREG, the VREGENZ pin should be tied low and the appropriate recommended
operating voltage should be supplied to the VDDIO and VDDA pins. In this case, the VDD voltage needed by
the core logic will be generated by the VREG. Each VDD pin requires on the order of 1.2 μF (minimum)
capacitance for proper regulation of the VREG. These capacitors should be located as close as possible
to the VDD pins.
2.6.1.2 Disabling the On-chip VREG
To conserve power, it is also possible to disable the on-chip VREG and supply the core logic voltage to
the VDD pins with a more efficient external regulator. To enable this option, the VREGENZ pin must be tied
high.
30
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
2.6.2 On-chip Power-On Reset (POR) and Brown-Out Reset (BOR) Circuit
The purpose of the POR is to create a clean reset throughout the device during the entire power-up
procedure. The trip point is a looser, lower trip point than the BOR, which watches for dips in the VDD or
VDDIO rail during device operation. The POR function is present on both VDD and VDDIO rails at all times.
After initial device power-up, the BOR function is present on VDDIO at all times, and on VDD when the
internal VREG is enabled (VREGENZ pin is tied low). Both functions tie the XRS pin low when one of the
voltages is below their respective trip point. Additionally, when the internal voltage regulator is enabled, an
over-voltage protection circuit will tie XRS low if the VDD rail rises above its trip point. See Section 4.3 for
the various trip points as well as the delay time for the device to release the XRS pin after the under-
voltage or over-voltage condition is removed. Figure 2-5 shows the VREG, POR, and BOR. To disable
both the VDD and VDDIO BOR functions, a bit is provided in the BORCFG register. See the System Control
and Interrupts chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical Reference Manual (literature number
SPRUHE5) for details.
In
I/O Pin
Out
(Force Hi-Z When High)
DIR (0 = Input, 1 = Output)
SYSRS
Internal
Weak PU
SYSCLKOUT
Deglitch
XRS
Filter
Sync
RS
C28x
Core
MCLKRS
PLL
JTAG
TCK
Detect
Logic
XRS
Pin
+
Clocking
Logic
VREGHALT
WDRST(A)
PBRS(B)
POR/BOR
Generating
Module
On-Chip
Voltage
Regulator
(VREG)
VREGENZ
A. WDRST is the reset signal from the CPU-watchdog.
B. PBRS is the reset signal from the POR/BOR module.
Figure 2-5. VREG + POR + BOR + Reset Signal Connectivity
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
31
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.7 System Control
This section describes the oscillator and clocking mechanisms, the watchdog function and the low power
modes.
Table 2-18. PLL, Clocking, Watchdog, and Low-Power Mode Registers
NAME
BORCFG
ADDRESS
0x00 0985
0x00 7010
0x00 7011
0x00 7012
0x00 7013
0x00 7014
0x00 7016
0x00 701B
0x00 701C
0x00 701D
0x00 701E
0x00 7020
0x00 7021
0x00 7022
0x00 7023
0x00 7024
0x00 7025
0x00 7029
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION(1)
BOR Configuration Register
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
XCLK
XCLKOUT Control
PLLSTS
PLL Status Register
CLKCTL
Clock Control Register
PLLLOCKPRD
INTOSC1TRIM
INTOSC2TRIM
LOSPCP
PCLKCR0
PCLKCR1
LPMCR0
PCLKCR3
PLLCR
PLL Lock Period
Internal Oscillator 1 Trim Register
Internal Oscillator 2 Trim Register
Low-Speed Peripheral Clock Prescaler Register
Peripheral Clock Control Register 0
Peripheral Clock Control Register 1
Low Power Mode Control Register 0
Peripheral Clock Control Register 3
PLL Control Register
SCSR
System Control and Status Register
Watchdog Counter Register
Peripheral Clock Control Register 4
Watchdog Reset Key Register
Watchdog Control Register
WDCNTR
PCLKCR4
WDKEY
WDCR
(1) All registers in this table are EALLOW protected.
32
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Figure 2-6 shows the various clock domains that are discussed. Figure 2-7 shows the various clock
sources (both internal and external) that can provide a clock for device operation.
SYSCLKOUT
PCLKCR0/1/3/4
(System Ctrl Regs)
LOSPCP
(System Ctrl Regs)
C28x Core
CLKIN
Clock Enables
LSPCLK
Peripheral
Registers
SPI-A, SCI-A, SCI-B, SCI-C
Clock Enables
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Peripheral
Registers
eCAP1, eQEP1
/2
Peripheral
Registers
GPIO
Mux
eCAN-A
Clock Enables
ePWM1, ePWM2,
ePWM3, ePWM4,
ePWM5, ePWM6, ePWM7
Peripheral
Registers
Clock Enables
I2C-A
Peripheral
Registers
Clock Enables
ADC
Registers
9 Ch
12-Bit ADC
Analog
Clock Enables
AFE
AFE
Registers
7 Ch
A. CLKIN is the clock into the CPU. CLKIN is passed out of the CPU as SYSCLKOUT (that is, CLKIN is the same
frequency as SYSCLKOUT).
Figure 2-6. Clock and Reset Domains
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
33
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
CLKCTL[WDCLKSRCSEL]
Internal
0
OSC1CLK
INTOSC1TRIM Reg(A)
OSC 1
OSCCLKSRC1
(10 MHz)
WDCLK
CPU-Watchdog
(OSC1CLK on XRS reset)
OSCE
1
CLKCTL[INTOSC1OFF]
1 = Turn OSC Off
CLKCTL[OSCCLKSRCSEL]
OSCCLK
CLKCTL[INTOSC1HALT]
WAKEOSC
1 = Ignore HALT
0
1
Internal
OSC 2
(10 MHz)
OSC2CLK
INTOSC2TRIM Reg(A)
PLL
Missing-Clock-Detect Circuit(B)
(OSC1CLK on XRS reset)
OSCE
CLKCTL[TRM2CLKPRESCALE]
CLKCTL[TMR2CLKSRCSEL]
1 = Turn OSC Off
10
11
CLKCTL[INTOSC2OFF]
Prescale
/1, /2, /4,
/8, /16
SYNC
Edge
Detect
01, 10, 11
CPUTMR2CLK
1 = Ignore HALT
01
1
0
00
CLKCTL[INTOSC2HALT]
SYSCLKOUT
OSCCLKSRC2
CLKCTL[OSCCLKSRC2SEL]
0 = GPIO38
1 = GPIO19
XCLK[XCLKINSEL]
CLKCTL[XCLKINOFF]
0
1
0
GPIO19
or
XCLKIN
GPIO38
XCLKIN
X1
X2
EXTCLK
(Crystal)
OSC
XTAL
WAKEOSC
(Oscillators enabled when this signal is high)
0 = OSC on (default on reset)
1 = Turn OSC off
CLKCTL[XTALOSCOFF]
A. Register loaded from TI OTP-based calibration function.
B. See Section 2.7.4 for details on missing clock detection.
Figure 2-7. Clock Tree
34
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
2.7.1 Internal Zero-Pin Oscillators
The F2805x devices contain two independent internal zero-pin oscillators. By default both oscillators are
turned on at power up, and internal oscillator 1 is the default clock source at this time. For power savings,
unused oscillators may be powered down by the user. The center frequency of these oscillators is
determined by their respective oscillator trim registers, written to in the calibration routine as part of the
boot ROM execution. See Section 5.2.1 for more information on these oscillators.
2.7.2 Crystal Oscillator Option
The typical specifications for the external quartz crystal (fundamental mode, parallel resonant) are listed in
Table 2-19. Furthermore, ESR range = 30 to 150 Ω.
Table 2-19. Typical Specifications for External Quartz Crystal(1)
FREQUENCY (MHz)
Rd (Ω)
2200
470
0
CL1 (pF)
18
CL2 (pF)
18
5
10
15
20
15
15
15
15
0
12
12
(1) Cshunt should be less than or equal to 5 pF.
XCLKIN/GPIO19/38
X1
X2
Rd
Turn off
XCLKIN path
in CLKCTL
register
CL1
Crystal
CL2
Figure 2-8. Using the On-chip Crystal Oscillator
NOTE
1. CL1 and CL2 are the total capacitance of the circuit board and components excluding the
IC and crystal. The value is usually approximately twice the value of the crystal's load
capacitance.
2. The load capacitance of the crystal is described in the crystal specifications of the
manufacturers.
3. TI recommends that customers have the resonator/crystal vendor characterize the
operation of their device with the MCU chip. The resonator/crystal vendor has the
equipment and expertise to tune the tank circuit. The vendor can also advise the
customer regarding the proper tank component values that will produce proper start up
and stability over the entire operating range.
XCLKIN/GPIO19/38
X1
X2
NC
External Clock Signal
(Toggling 0−V
)
DDIO
Figure 2-9. Using a 3.3-V External Oscillator
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
35
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.7.3 PLL-Based Clock Module
The devices have an on-chip, PLL-based clock module. This module provides all the necessary clocking
signals for the device, as well as control for low-power mode entry. The PLL has a 4-bit ratio control
PLLCR[DIV] to select different CPU clock rates. The watchdog module should be disabled before writing
to the PLLCR register. The watchdog module can be re-enabled (if need be) after the PLL module has
stabilized, which takes 1 ms. The input clock and PLLCR[DIV] bits should be chosen in such a way that
the output frequency of the PLL (VCOCLK) is at least 50 MHz.
Table 2-20. PLL Settings
SYSCLKOUT (CLKIN)
PLLCR[DIV] VALUE(1) (2)
PLLSTS[DIVSEL] = 0 or 1(3)
OSCCLK/4 (Default)(1)
(OSCCLK * 1)/4
PLLSTS[DIVSEL] = 2
OSCCLK/2
PLLSTS[DIVSEL] = 3
OSCCLK
0000 (PLL bypass)
0001
(OSCCLK * 1)/2
(OSCCLK * 2)/2
(OSCCLK * 3)/2
(OSCCLK * 4)/2
(OSCCLK * 5)/2
(OSCCLK * 6)/2
(OSCCLK * 7)/2
(OSCCLK * 8)/2
(OSCCLK * 9)/2
(OSCCLK * 10)/2
(OSCCLK * 11)/2
(OSCCLK * 12)/2
(OSCCLK * 1)/1
(OSCCLK * 2)/1
(OSCCLK * 3)/1
(OSCCLK * 4)/1
(OSCCLK * 5)/1
(OSCCLK * 6)/1
(OSCCLK * 7)/1
(OSCCLK * 8)/1
(OSCCLK * 9)/1
(OSCCLK * 10)/1
(OSCCLK * 11)/1
(OSCCLK * 12)/1
0010
(OSCCLK * 2)/4
0011
(OSCCLK * 3)/4
0100
(OSCCLK * 4)/4
0101
(OSCCLK * 5)/4
0110
(OSCCLK * 6)/4
0111
(OSCCLK * 7)/4
1000
(OSCCLK * 8)/4
1001
(OSCCLK * 9)/4
1010
(OSCCLK * 10)/4
(OSCCLK * 11)/4
(OSCCLK * 12)/4
1011
1100
(1) The PLL control register (PLLCR) and PLL Status Register (PLLSTS) are reset to their default state by the XRS signal or a watchdog
reset only. A reset issued by the debugger or the missing clock detect logic has no effect.
(2) This register is EALLOW protected. See the System Control and Interrupts chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical Reference
Manual (literature number SPRUHE5) for more information.
(3) By default, PLLSTS[DIVSEL] is configured for /4. (The boot ROM changes the PLLSTS[DIVSEL] configuration to /1.) PLLSTS[DIVSEL]
must be 0 before writing to the PLLCR and should be changed only after PLLSTS[PLLLOCKS] = 1.
Table 2-21. CLKIN Divide Options
PLLSTS [DIVSEL]
CLKIN DIVIDE
0
1
2
3
/4
/4
/2
/1
36
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
The PLL-based clock module provides four modes of operation:
•
INTOSC1 (Internal Zero-pin Oscillator 1): INTOSC1 is the on-chip internal oscillator 1. INTOSC1 can
provide the clock for the Watchdog block, core and CPU-Timer 2.
•
INTOSC2 (Internal Zero-pin Oscillator 2): INTOSC2 is the on-chip internal oscillator 2. INTOSC2 can
provide the clock for the Watchdog block, core and CPU-Timer 2. Both INTOSC1 and INTOSC2 can
be independently chosen for the Watchdog block, core and CPU-Timer 2.
•
•
Crystal/Resonator Operation: The on-chip (crystal) oscillator enables the use of an external
crystal/resonator attached to the device to provide the time base. The crystal/resonator is connected to
the X1/X2 pins. Some devices may not have the X1/X2 pins. See Table 3-1 for details.
External Clock Source Operation: If the on-chip (crystal) oscillator is not used, this mode allows the
on-chip (crystal) oscillator to be bypassed. The device clocks are generated from an external clock
source input on the XCLKIN pin. Note that the XCLKIN is multiplexed with GPIO19 or GPIO38 pin. The
XCLKIN input can be selected as GPIO19 or GPIO38 via the XCLKINSEL bit in XCLK register. The
CLKCTL[XCLKINOFF] bit disables this clock input (forced low). If the clock source is not used or the
respective pins are used as GPIOs, the user should disable at boot time.
Before changing clock sources, ensure that the target clock is present. If a clock is not present, then that
clock source must be disabled (using the CLKCTL register) before switching clocks.
Table 2-22. Possible PLL Configuration Modes
CLKIN AND
SYSCLKOUT
PLL MODE
REMARKS
PLLSTS[DIVSEL]
Invoked by the user setting the PLLOFF bit in the PLLSTS register. The PLL block
is disabled in this mode. The PLL block being disabled can be useful in reducing
system noise and for low-power operation. The PLLCR register must first be set to
0x0000 (PLL Bypass) before entering this mode. The CPU clock (CLKIN) is
derived directly from the input clock on either X1/X2, X1 or XCLKIN.
0, 1
2
3
OSCCLK/4
OSCCLK/2
OSCCLK/1
PLL Off
PLL Bypass is the default PLL configuration upon power-up or after an external
reset (XRS). This mode is selected when the PLLCR register is set to 0x0000 or
while the PLL locks to a new frequency after the PLLCR register has been
modified. In this mode, the PLL itself is bypassed but the PLL is not turned off.
0, 1
2
3
OSCCLK/4
OSCCLK/2
OSCCLK/1
PLL Bypass
PLL Enable
0, 1
2
3
OSCCLK * n/4
OSCCLK * n/2
OSCCLK * n/1
Achieved by writing a non-zero value n into the PLLCR register. Upon writing to the
PLLCR the device will switch to PLL Bypass mode until the PLL locks.
2.7.4 Loss of Input Clock (NMI Watchdog Function)
The 2805x devices may be clocked from either one of the internal zero-pin oscillators (INTOSC1 or
INTOSC2), the on-chip crystal oscillator, or from an external clock input. Regardless of the clock source,
in PLL-enabled and PLL-bypass mode, if the input clock to the PLL vanishes, the PLL will issue a limp-
mode clock at its output. This limp-mode clock continues to clock the CPU and peripherals at a typical
frequency of 1–5 MHz.
When the limp mode is activated, a CLOCKFAIL signal is generated that is latched as an NMI interrupt.
Depending on how the NMIRESETSEL bit has been configured, a reset to the device can be fired
immediately or the NMI watchdog counter can issue a reset when the counter overflows. In addition to this
action, the Missing Clock Status (MCLKSTS) bit is set. The NMI interrupt could be used by the application
to detect the input clock failure and initiate necessary corrective action such as switching over to an
alternative clock source (if available) or initiate a shut-down procedure for the system.
If the software does not respond to the clock-fail condition, the NMI watchdog triggers a reset after a
preprogrammed time interval. Figure 2-10 shows the interrupt mechanisms involved.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
37
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
NMIFLG[NMINT]
NMIFLGCLR[NMINT]
Clear
Latch
Set
Clear
XRS
Generate
Interrupt
Pulse
When
Input = 1
NMIFLG[CLOCKFAIL]
Clear
Latch
1
0
0
NMIFLGCLR[CLOCKFAIL]
CLOCKFAIL
NMINT
SYNC?
Set
Clear
SYSCLKOUT
NMICFG[CLOCKFAIL]
NMIFLGFRC[CLOCKFAIL]
XRS
SYSCLKOUT
SYSRS
NMIWDPRD[15:0]
NMIWDCNT[15:0]
See System
Control Section
NMI Watchdog
NMIRS
Figure 2-10. NMI-watchdog
2.7.5 CPU-Watchdog Module
The CPU-watchdog module on the 2805x device is similar to the one used on the 281x, 280x, and 283xx
devices. This module generates an output pulse, 512 oscillator clocks wide (OSCCLK), whenever the 8-bit
watchdog up counter has reached its maximum value. To prevent this occurrence, the user must disable
the counter or the software must periodically write a 0x55 + 0xAA sequence into the watchdog key register
that resets the watchdog counter. Figure 2-11 shows the various functional blocks within the watchdog
module.
Normally, when the input clocks are present, the CPU-watchdog counter decrements to initiate a CPU-
watchdog reset or WDINT interrupt. However, when the external input clock fails, the CPU-watchdog
counter stops decrementing (that is, the watchdog counter does not change with the limp-mode clock).
NOTE
The CPU-watchdog is different from the NMI watchdog. The CPU-watchdog is the legacy
watchdog that is present in all 28x devices.
NOTE
Applications in which the correct CPU operating frequency is absolutely critical should
implement a mechanism by which the MCU will be held in reset, should the input clocks ever
fail. For example, an R-C circuit may be used to trigger the XRS pin of the MCU, should the
capacitor ever get fully charged. An I/O pin may be used to discharge the capacitor on a
periodic basis to prevent the capacitor from getting fully charged. Such a circuit would also
help in detecting failure of the flash memory.
38
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
WDCR (WDPS[2:0])
WDCR (WDDIS)
WDCNTR(7:0)
WDCLK
WDCLK
8-Bit
Watchdog
Counter
CLR
Watchdog
Prescaler
/512
Clear Counter
Internal
Pullup
WDKEY(7:0)
WDRST
WDINT
Generate
Watchdog
55 + AA
Key Detector
Output Pulse
(512 OSCCLKs)
Good Key
XRS
Bad
WDCHK
Key
Core-reset
SCSR (WDENINT)
WDCR (WDCHK[2:0])
1
0
1
(A)
WDRST
A. The WDRST signal is driven low for 512 OSCCLK cycles.
Figure 2-11. CPU-watchdog Module
The WDINT signal enables the watchdog to be used as a wakeup from IDLE/STANDBY mode.
In STANDBY mode, all peripherals are turned off on the device. The only peripheral that remains
functional is the CPU-watchdog. This module will run off OSCCLK. The WDINT signal is fed to the LPM
block so that the signal can wake the device from STANDBY (if enabled). See Section 2.8, Low-power
Modes Block, for more details.
In IDLE mode, the WDINT signal can generate an interrupt to the CPU, via the PIE, to take the CPU out of
IDLE mode.
In HALT mode, the CPU-watchdog can be used to wake up the device through a device reset.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Overview
39
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
2.8 Low-power Modes Block
Table 2-23 summarizes the various modes.
Table 2-23. Low-power Modes
MODE
LPMCR0(1:0)
OSCCLK
CLKIN
SYSCLKOUT
EXIT(1)
XRS, CPU-watchdog interrupt, any
enabled interrupt
IDLE
00
On
On
On
On
XRS, CPU-watchdog interrupt, GPIO
Port A signal, debugger(2)
STANDBY
HALT(3)
01
Off
Off
(CPU-watchdog still running)
Off
(on-chip crystal oscillator and
PLL turned off, zero-pin oscillator
and CPU-watchdog state
dependent on user code.)
XRS, GPIO Port A signal, debugger(2)
CPU-watchdog
,
1X
Off
Off
(1) The Exit column lists which signals or under what conditions the low power mode is exited. A low signal, on any of the signals, exits the
low power condition. This signal must be kept low long enough for an interrupt to be recognized by the device. Otherwise, the low-power
mode will not be exited and the device will go back into the indicated low power mode.
(2) The JTAG port can still function even if the CPU clock (CLKIN) is turned off.
(3) The WDCLK must be active for the device to go into HALT mode.
The various low-power modes operate as follows:
IDLE Mode:
This mode is exited by any enabled interrupt that is recognized by the
processor. The LPM block performs no tasks during this mode as long as
the LPMCR0(LPM) bits are set to 0,0.
STANDBY Mode:
Any GPIO port A signal (GPIO[31:0]) can wake the device from STANDBY
mode. The user must select which signals will wake the device in the
GPIOLPMSEL register. The selected signals are also qualified by the
OSCCLK before waking the device. The number of OSCCLKs is specified in
the LPMCR0 register.
HALT Mode:
CPU-watchdog, XRS, and any GPIO port A signal (GPIO[31:0]) can wake
the device from HALT mode. The user selects the signal in the
GPIOLPMSEL register.
NOTE
The low-power modes do not affect the state of the output pins (PWM pins included). They
will be in whatever state the code left them in when the IDLE instruction was executed. See
the System Control and Interrupts chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical
Reference Manual (literature number SPRUHE5) for more details.
2.9 Thermal Design Considerations
Based on the end application design and operational profile, the IDD and IDDIO currents could vary.
Systems that exceed the recommended maximum power dissipation in the end product may require
additional thermal enhancements. Ambient temperature (TA) varies with the end application and product
design. The critical factor that affects reliability and functionality is TJ, the junction temperature, not the
ambient temperature. Hence, care should be taken to keep TJ within the specified limits. Tcase should be
measured to estimate the operating junction temperature TJ. Tcase is normally measured at the center of
the package top-side surface. The thermal application reports IC Package Thermal Metrics (literature
number SPRA953) and Reliability Data for TMS320LF24xx and TMS320F28xx Devices (literature number
SPRA963) help to understand the thermal metrics and definitions.
40
Device Overview
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
3 Device Pins
3.1 Pin Assignments
Figure 3-1 shows the 80-pin PN Low-Profile Quad Flatpack (LQFP) pin assignments.
GPIO11/EPWM6B/SCIRXDB
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
GPIO26/SCIRXDC
TEST2
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
GPIO5/EPWM3B/SPISIMOA/ECAP1
GPIO4/EPWM3A
V
DDIO
V
GPIO40/EPWM7A
SS
GPIO10/EPWM6A/ADCSOCBO
GPIO3/EPWM2B/SPISOMIA/CTRIPM2OUT (COMP2OUT)
GPIO2/EPWM2A
GPIO9/EPWM5B/SCITXDB
GPIO30/CANRXA/SCIRXDB/EPWM7A
GPIO31/CANTXA/SCITXDB/EPWM7B
GPIO27/SCITXDC
PFCGND
GPIO1/EPWM1B/CTRIPM1OUT (COMP1OUT)
GPIO0/EPWM1A
V
ADCINB7 (op-amp)
ADCINB0
DDIO
VREGENZ
V
V
ADCINB6 (op-amp)
ADCINB5
SS
DD
GPIO34/CTRIPM2OUT (COMP2OUT)/CTRIPPFCOUT (COMP3OUT)
GPIO15/TZ1/CTRIPM1OUT/SCIRXDB
M2GND
ADCINB4 (op-amp)
ADCINB3
GPIO13/TZ2/CTRIPM2OUT
GPIO14/TZ3/CTRIPPFCOUT/SCITXDB
ADCINA7
GPIO20/EQEP1A/EPWM7A/CTRIPM1OUT (COMP1OUT)
GPIO21/EQEP1B/EPWM7B/CTRIPM2OUT (COMP2OUT)
GPIO23/EQEP1I/SCIRXDB
ADCINA6 (op-amp)
V
V
REFLO
SSA
Figure 3-1. 2805x 80-Pin PN LQFP (Top View)
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
41
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
3.2 Terminal Functions
Table 3-1 describes the signals. With the exception of the JTAG pins, the GPIO function is the default at
reset, unless otherwise mentioned. The peripheral signals that are listed under them are alternate
functions. Some peripheral functions may not be available in all devices. See Table 2-1 for details. Inputs
are not 5-V tolerant. All GPIO pins are I/O/Z and have an internal pullup, which can be selectively enabled
or disabled on a per-pin basis. This feature only applies to the GPIO pins. The pullups on the PWM pins
are not enabled at reset. The pullups on other GPIO pins are enabled upon reset.
NOTE: When the on-chip VREG is used, the GPIO19, GPIO34, GPIO35, GPIO36, GPIO37, and GPIO38
pins could glitch during power up. If this behavior is unacceptable in an application, 1.8 V could be
supplied externally. There is no power-sequencing requirement when using an external 1.8-V supply.
However, if the 3.3-V transistors in the level-shifting output buffers of the I/O pins are powered prior to the
1.9-V transistors, it is possible for the output buffers to turn on, causing a glitch to occur on the pin during
power up. To avoid this behavior, power the VDD pins prior to or simultaneously with the VDDIO pins,
ensuring that the VDD pins have reached 0.7 V before the VDDIO pins reach 0.7 V.
Table 3-1. Terminal Functions(1)
TERMINAL
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
PN
PIN NO.
NAME
JTAG
JTAG test reset with internal pulldown. TRST, when driven high, gives the scan system control
of the operations of the device. If this signal is not connected or driven low, the device
operates in its functional mode, and the test reset signals are ignored. NOTE: TRST is an
active high test pin and must be maintained low at all times during normal device operation.
An external pull-down resistor is required on this pin. The value of this resistor should be
based on drive strength of the debugger pods applicable to the design. A 2.2-kΩ resistor
generally offers adequate protection. Since the value of the resistor is application-specific, TI
recommends that each target board be validated for proper operation of the debugger and the
application. (↓)
TRST
9
I
See
GPIO38
TCK
TMS
TDI
I
See GPIO38. JTAG test clock with internal pullup. (↑)
See
GPIO36
See GPIO36. JTAG test-mode select (TMS) with internal pullup. This serial control input is
clocked into the TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK.. (↑)
I
I
See
GPIO35
See GPIO35. JTAG test data input (TDI) with internal pullup. TDI is clocked into the selected
register (instruction or data) on a rising edge of TCK. (↑)
See
GPIO37
See GPIO37. JTAG scan out, test data output (TDO). The contents of the selected register
(instruction or data) are shifted out of TDO on the falling edge of TCK. (8 mA drive)
TDO
O/Z
FLASH
TEST2
39
I/O
Test Pin. Reserved for TI. Must be left unconnected.
(1) I = Input, O = Output, Z = High Impedance, OD = Open Drain, ↑ = Pullup, ↓ = Pulldown
42
Device Pins
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 3-1. Terminal Functions(1) (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
PN
PIN NO.
CLOCK
See GPIO18. Output clock derived from SYSCLKOUT. XCLKOUT is either the same
frequency, one-half the frequency, or one-fourth the frequency of SYSCLKOUT. The value of
XCLKOUT is controlled by bits 1:0 (XCLKOUTDIV) in the XCLK register. At reset, XCLKOUT
= SYSCLKOUT/4. The XCLKOUT signal can be turned off by setting XCLKOUTDIV to 3. The
mux control for GPIO18 must also be set to XCLKOUT for this signal to propogate to the pin.
See
GPIO18
XCLKOUT
O/Z
See GPIO19 and GPIO38. External oscillator input. Pin source for the clock is controlled by
the XCLKINSEL bit in the XCLK register, GPIO38 is the default selection. This pin feeds a
clock from an external 3.3-V oscillator. In this case, the X1 pin, if available, must be tied to
GND and the on-chip crystal oscillator must be disabled via bit 14 in the CLKCTL register. If a
crystal/resonator is used, the XCLKIN path must be disabled by bit 13 in the CLKCTL register.
NOTE: Designs that use the GPIO38/TCK/XCLKIN pin to supply an external clock for normal
device operation may need to incorporate some hooks to disable this path during debug using
the JTAG connector. This action is to prevent contention with the TCK signal, which is active
during JTAG debug sessions. The zero-pin internal oscillators may be used during this time to
clock the device.
See
GPIO19
and
XCLKIN
I
GPIO38
On-chip crystal-oscillator input. To use this oscillator, a quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator
must be connected across X1 and X2. In this case, the XCLKIN path must be disabled by bit
13 in the CLKCTL register. If this pin is not used, this pin must be tied to GND. (I)
X1
X2
52
51
I
On-chip crystal-oscillator output. A quartz crystal or a ceramic resonator must be connected
across X1 and X2. If X2 is not used, X2 must be left unconnected. (O)
O
RESET
Device Reset (in) and Watchdog Reset (out). The device has a built-in power-on-reset (POR)
and brown-out-reset (BOR) circuitry. As such, no external circuitry is needed to generate a
reset pulse. During a power-on or brown-out condition, this pin is driven low by the device.
See Section 4.3, Electrical Characteristics, for thresholds of the POR/BOR block. This pin is
also driven low by the MCU when a watchdog reset occurs. During watchdog reset, the XRS
pin is driven low for the watchdog reset duration of 512 OSCCLK cycles. If need be, an
external circuitry may also drive this pin to assert a device reset. In this case, TI recommends
that this pin be driven by an open-drain device. An R-C circuit must be connected to this pin
for noise immunity reasons. Regardless of the source, a device reset causes the device to
terminate execution. The program counter points to the address contained at the location
0x3FFFC0. When reset is deactivated, execution begins at the location designated by the
program counter. The output buffer of this pin is an open-drain with an internal pullup. (I/OD)
XRS
8
I/O
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
43
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 3-1. Terminal Functions(1) (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
PN
PIN NO.
ADC, COMPARATOR, ANALOG I/O
ADCINA7
24
23
I
I
ADC Group A, Channel 7 input
ADC Group A, Channel 6 input
ADC Group A, Channel 5 input
ADCINA6
(op-amp)
ADCINA5
10
11
I
O
I
ADCBGOUT
ADCINA4
ADC Group A, Channel 4 input
ADC Group A, Channel 3 input
ADC Group A, Channel 2 input
ADC Group A, Channel 1 input
ADCINA3
(op-amp)
12
13
14
18
I
I
I
I
ADCINA2
ADCINA1
(op-amp)
ADCINA0
VREFOUT
ADC Group A, Channel 0 input
Voltage Reference out from buffered DAC
ADC External Reference – used when in ADC external reference mode and used as VREFOUT
reference
VREFHI
19
31
I
I
ADCINB7
(op-amp)
ADC Group B, Channel 7 input
ADCINB6
(op-amp)
29
28
26
I
I
I
ADC Group B, Channel 6 input
ADC Group B, Channel 5 input
ADC Group B, Channel 4 input
ADCINB5
ADCINB4
(op-amp)
ADCINB3
ADCINB2
25
16
I
I
ADC Group B, Channel 3 input
ADC Group B, Channel 2 input
ADCINB1
(op-amp)
17
I
ADC Group B, Channel 1 input
ADCINB0
VREFLO
30
22
I
I
ADC Group B, Channel 0 input
ADC Low Reference (always tied to ground)
44
Device Pins
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 3-1. Terminal Functions(1) (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
PN
PIN NO.
CPU AND I/O POWER
VDDA
VSSA
VDD
20
21
6
Analog Power Pin. Tie with a 2.2-μF capacitor (typical) close to the pin.
Analog Ground Pin
CPU and Logic Digital Power Pins – no supply source needed when using internal VREG. Tie
with 1.2 µF (minimum) ceramic capacitor (10% tolerance) to ground when using internal
VREG. Higher value capacitors may be used, but could impact supply-rail ramp-up time.
VDD
54
73
38
70
7
VDD
VDDIO
VDDIO
VSS
Digital I/O and Flash Power Pin – Single Supply source when VREG is enabled
VSS
37
53
72
15
27
32
Digital Ground Pins
VSS
VSS
M1GND
M2GND
PFCGND
Ground pin for M1 channel
Ground pin for M2 channel
Ground pin for PFC channel
VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL SIGNAL
Internal VREG Enable/Disable – pull low to enable VREG, pull high to disable VREG
VREGENZ
71
69
68
I
(1)
GPIO AND PERIPHERAL SIGNALS
GPIO0
I/O/Z
O
General-purpose input/output 0
Enhanced PWM1 Output A
General-purpose input/output 1
Enhanced PWM1 Output B
EPWM1A
GPIO1
I/O/Z
O
EPWM1B
CTRIPM1OUT
(COMP1OUT)
CTRIPM1 CTRIPxx output
(Direct output of Comparator 1)
O
GPIO2
67
66
I/O/Z
O
General-purpose input/output 2
Enhanced PWM2 Output A
General-purpose input/output 3
Enhanced PWM2 Output B
SPI-A slave out, master in
EPWM2A
GPIO3
I/O/Z
O
EPWM2B
SPISOMIA
I/O
CTRIPM2OUT
(COMP2OUT)
CTRIPM2 CTRIPxx output
(Direct output of Comparator 2)
O
GPIO4
63
62
I/O/Z
O
General-purpose input/output 4
Enhanced PWM3 output A
General-purpose input/output 5
Enhanced PWM3 output B
SPI-A slave in, master out
EPWM3A
GPIO5
I/O/Z
O
EPWM3B
SPISIMOA
ECAP1
I/O
I/O
Enhanced Capture input/output 1
(1) The GPIO function (shown in bold italics) is the default at reset. The peripheral signals that are listed under them are alternate functions.
For JTAG pins that have the GPIO functionality multiplexed, the input path to the GPIO block is always valid. The output path from the
GPIO block and the path to the JTAG block from a pin is enabled or disabled based on the condition of the TRST signal. See the
System Control and Interrupts chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical Reference Manual (literature number SPRUHE5) for
details.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
45
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 3-1. Terminal Functions(1) (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
PN
PIN NO.
GPIO6
EPWM4A
50
I/O/Z
General-purpose input/output 6
Enhanced PWM4 output A
External ePWM sync pulse input
External ePWM sync pulse output
General-purpose input/output 7
Enhanced PWM4 output B
SCI-A receive data
O
EPWMSYNCI
EPWMSYNCO
GPIO7
I
O
49
45
36
65
61
48
I/O/Z
O
EPWM4B
SCIRXDA
GPIO8
I
I/O/Z
O
General-purpose input/output 8
Enhanced PWM5 output A
ADC start-of-conversion A
General-purpose input/output 9
Enhanced PWM5 output B
SCI-B transmit data
EPWM5A
ADCSOCAO
GPIO9
O
I/O/Z
O
EPWM5B
SCITXDB
GPIO10
O
I/O/Z
O
General-purpose input/output 10
Enhanced PWM6 output A
ADC start-of-conversion B
General-purpose input/output 11
Enhanced PWM6 output B
SCI-B receive data
EPWM6A
ADCSOCBO
GPIO11
O
I/O/Z
O
EPWM6B
SCIRXDB
GPIO12
I
I/O/Z
I
General-purpose input/output 12
Trip Zone input 1
TZ1
CTRIPM1OUT
SCITXDA
GPIO13
O
CTRIPM1 CTRIPxx output
SCI-A transmit data
O
76
77
I/O/Z
I
General-purpose input/output 13
Trip zone input 2
TZ2
CTRIPM2OUT
GPIO14
O
CTRIPM2 CTRIPxx output
General-purpose input/output 14
Trip zone input 3
I/O/Z
I
TZ3
CTRIPPFCOUT
SCITXDB
GPIO15
O
CTRIPPFC output
O
SCI-B transmit data
75
47
I/O/Z
I
General-purpose input/output 15
Trip zone input 1
TZ1
CTRIPM1OUT
SCIRXDB
GPIO16
O
CTRIPM1 CTRIPxx output
SCI-B receive data
I
I/O/Z
I/O
I/O
I
General-purpose input/output 16
SPI-A slave in, master out
Enhanced QEP1 strobe
Trip Zone input 2
SPISIMOA
EQEP1S
TZ2
CTRIPM2OUT
GPIO17
O
CTRIPM2 CTRIPxx output
General-purpose input/output 17
SPI-A slave out, master in
Enhanced QEP1 index
44
I/O/Z
I/O
I/O
I
SPISOMIA
EQEP1I
TZ3
Trip zone input 3
CTRIPPFCOUT
O
CTRIPPFC output
46
Device Pins
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 3-1. Terminal Functions(1) (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
GPIO18
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
PN
PIN NO.
43
I/O/Z
I/O
General-purpose input/output 18
SPI-A clock input/output
SCI-B transmit data
SPICLKA
SCITXDB
XCLKOUT
O
O/Z
Output clock derived from SYSCLKOUT. XCLKOUT is either the same frequency, one-half the
frequency, or one-fourth the frequency of SYSCLKOUT. The value of XCLKOUT is controlled
by bits 1:0 (XCLKOUTDIV) in the XCLK register. At reset, XCLKOUT = SYSCLKOUT/4. The
XCLKOUT signal can be turned off by setting XCLKOUTDIV to 3. The mux control for GPIO18
must also be set to XCLKOUT for this signal to propogate to the pin.
GPIO19
55
I/O/Z
I
General-purpose input/output 19
XCLKIN
External Oscillator Input. The path from this pin to the clock block is not gated by the mux
function of this pin. Care must be taken not to enable this path for clocking if this path is being
used for the other periperhal functions
SPISTEA
SCIRXDB
ECAP1
I/O
SPI-A slave transmit enable input/output
SCI-B receive data
I
I/O
I/O/Z
I
Enhanced Capture input/output 1
General-purpose input/output 20
Enhanced QEP1 input A
GPIO20
78
79
EQEP1A
EPWM7A
O
Enhanced PWM7 output A
CTRIPM1OUT
(COMP1OUT)
CTRIPM1 CTRIPxx output
(Direct output of Comparator 1)
O
GPIO21
I/O/Z
General-purpose input/output 21
Enhanced QEP1 input B
EQEP1B
EPWM7B
I
O
Enhanced PWM7 output B
CTRIPM2OUT
(COMP2OUT)
CTRIPM2 CTRIPxx output
(Direct output of Comparator 2)
O
GPIO22
EQEP1S
SCITXDB
GPIO23
EQEP1I
SCIRXDB
GPIO24
ECAP1
1
80
4
I/O/Z
I/O
O
General-purpose input/output 22
Enhanced QEP1 strobe
SCI-B transmit data
I/O/Z
I/O
I
General-purpose input/output 23
Enhanced QEP1 index
SCI-B receive data
I/O/Z
I/O
O
General-purpose input/output 24
Enhanced Capture input/output 1
Enhanced PWM7 output A
General-purpose input/output 25
General-purpose input/output 26
SCI-C receive data
EPWM7A
GPIO25
GPIO26
SCIRXDC
GPIO27
SCITXDC
GPIO28
SCIRXDA
SDAA
46
40
I/O/Z
I/O/Z
I
33
42
I/O/Z
O
General-purpose input/output 27
SCI-C transmit data
I/O/Z
I
General-purpose input/output 28
SCI-A receive data
I/OD
I
I2C data open-drain bidirectional port
Trip zone input 2
TZ2
CTRIPM2OUT
O
CTRIPM2 CTRIPxx output
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
47
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 3-1. Terminal Functions(1) (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
GPIO29
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
PN
PIN NO.
41
I/O/Z
O
General-purpose input/output 29
SCI-A transmit data
SCITXDA
SCLA
I/OD
I
I2C clock open-drain bidirectional port
Trip zone input 3
TZ3
CTRIPPFCOUT
GPIO30
O
CTRIPPFC output
35
34
2
I/O/Z
I
General-purpose input/output 30
CAN receive
CANRXA
SCIRXDB
EPWM7A
GPIO31
I
SCI-B receive data
O
Enhanced PWM7 output A
General-purpose input/output 31
CAN transmit
I/O/Z
O
CANTXA
SCITXDB
EPWM7B
GPIO32
O
SCI-B transmit data
O
Enhanced PWM7 output B
General-purpose input/output 32
I2C data open-drain bidirectional port
I/O/Z
I/OD
I
SDAA
EPWMSYNCI
EQEP1S
GPIO33
Enhanced PWM external sync pulse input
Enhanced QEP1 strobe
I/O
I/O/Z
I/OD
O
3
General-Purpose Input/Output 33
I2C clock open-drain bidirectional port
Enhanced PWM external synch pulse output
Enhanced QEP1 index
SCLA
EPWMSYNCO
EQEP1I
I/O
I/O/Z
GPIO34
74
General-Purpose Input/Output 34
CTRIPM2OUT
(COMP2OUT)
CTRIPM2 CTRIPxx output
(Direct output of Comparator 2)
O
O
CTRIPPFCOUT
(COMP3OUT)
CTRIPPFC output
(Direct output of Comparator 3)
GPIO35
TDI
59
60
58
57
I/O/Z
I
General-Purpose Input/Output 35
JTAG test data input (TDI) with internal pullup. TDI is clocked into the selected register
(instruction or data) on a rising edge of TCK
GPIO36
TMS
I/O/Z
I
General-Purpose Input/Output 36
JTAG test-mode select (TMS) with internal pullup. This serial control input is clocked into the
TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK.
GPIO37
TDO
I/O/Z
O/Z
General-Purpose Input/Output 37
JTAG scan out, test data output (TDO). The contents of the selected register (instruction or
data) are shifted out of TDO on the falling edge of TCK (8 mA drive)
GPIO38
TCK
I/O/Z
General-Purpose Input/Output 38
JTAG test clock with internal pullup
I
I
XCLKIN
External Oscillator Input. The path from this pin to the clock block is not gated by the mux
function of this pin. Care must be taken to not enable this path for clocking if this path is being
used for the other functions.
48
Device Pins
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 3-1. Terminal Functions(1) (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
GPIO39
I/O/Z
DESCRIPTION
PN
PIN NO.
56
I/O/Z
I
General-Purpose Input/Output 39
SCI-C receive data
SCIRXDC
CTRIPPFCOUT
GPIO40
O
CTRIPPFC output
64
5
I/O/Z
O
General-Purpose Input/Output 40
Enhanced PWM7 output A
General-Purpose Input/Output 42
Enhanced PWM7 output B
SCI-C transmit data
EPWM7A
GPIO42
I/O/Z
O
EPWM7B
SCITXDC
O
CTRIPM1OUT
(COMP1OUT)
CTRIPM1 CTRIPxx output
(Direct output of Comparator 1)
O
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Pins
49
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
4 Device Operating Conditions
4.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings(1) (2)
Supply voltage range, VDDIO (I/O and Flash)
Supply voltage range, VDD
with respect to VSS
–0.3 V to 4.6 V
–0.3 V to 2.5 V
–0.3 V to 4.6 V
–0.3 V to 4.6 V
–0.3 V to 4.6 V
±20 mA
with respect to VSS
with respect to VSSA
Analog voltage range, VDDA
Input voltage range, VIN (3.3 V)
Output voltage range, VO
(3)
Input clamp current, IIK (VIN < 0 or VIN > VDDIO
)
Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDDIO
)
±20 mA
(4)
Junction temperature range, TJ
–40°C to 150°C
–65°C to 150°C
(4)
Storage temperature range, Tstg
(1) Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under Section 4.2 is not implied.
Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
(2) All voltage values are with respect to VSS, unless otherwise noted.
(3) Continuous clamp current per pin is ± 2 mA.
(4) Long-term high-temperature storage or extended use at maximum temperature conditions may result in a reduction of overall device life.
For additional information, see IC Package Thermal Metrics Application Report (literature number SPRA953) and Reliability Data for
TMS320LF24xx and TMS320F28xx Devices Application Report (literature number SPRA963).
4.2 Recommended Operating Conditions
MIN
2.97
1.71
NOM
3.3
MAX
3.63
UNIT
(1)
Device supply voltage, I/O, VDDIO
V
Device supply voltage CPU, VDD (When internal
VREG is disabled and 1.8 V is supplied externally)
1.8
1.995
V
Supply ground, VSS
0
3.3
0
V
V
(1)
Analog supply voltage, VDDA
2.97
3.63
Analog ground, VSSA
V
Device clock frequency (system clock)
High-level input voltage, VIH (3.3 V)
Low-level input voltage, VIL (3.3 V)
High-level output source current, VOH = VOH(MIN) , IOH All GPIO pins
Group 2(2)
2
2
60
MHz
V
VDDIO + 0.3
VSS – 0.3
0.8
–4
–8
4
V
mA
mA
mA
mA
Low-level output sink current, VOL = VOL(MAX), IOL
All GPIO pins
Group 2(2)
T version
8
Junction temperature, TJ
–40
–40
105
125
°C
S version
(1) VDDIO and VDDA should be maintained within approximately 0.3 V of each other.
(2) Group 2 pins are as follows: GPIO16, GPIO17, GPIO18, GPIO28, GPIO29, GPIO30, GPIO31, GPIO36, GPIO37
50
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
4.3 Electrical Characteristics Over Recommended Operating Conditions (Unless
Otherwise Noted)(1)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
2.4
TYP
MAX UNIT
IOH = IOH MAX
IOH = 50 μA
VOH
VOL
High-level output voltage
Low-level output voltage
V
VDDIO – 0.2
IOL = IOL MAX
0.4
–205
–375
V
All GPIO pins
XRS pin
–80
–140
–300
Pin with pullup
VDDIO = 3.3 V, VIN = 0 V
enabled
Input current
(low level)
–230
IIL
μA
Pin with pulldown
enabled
VDDIO = 3.3 V, VIN = 0 V
VDDIO = 3.3 V, VIN = VDDIO
VDDIO = 3.3 V, VIN = VDDIO
VO = VDDIO or 0 V
±2
±2
80
Pin with pullup
enabled
Input current
(high level)
IIH
μA
Pin with pulldown
enabled
28
50
Output current, pullup or
pulldown disabled
IOZ
CI
±2 μA
Input capacitance
2
2.78
35
pF
V
VDDIO BOR trip point
VDDIO BOR hysteresis
Falling VDDIO
mV
Supervisor reset release delay
time
Time after BOR/POR/OVR event is removed to XRS
release
400
800 μs
VREG VDD output
Internal VREG on
1.9
V
(1) When the on-chip VREG is used, its output is monitored by the POR/BOR circuit, which will reset the device should the core voltage
(VDD) go out of range.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Operating Conditions
51
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
4.4 Current Consumption
Table 4-1. TMS320F2805x Current Consumption at 60-MHz SYSCLKOUT
VREG ENABLED
VREG DISABLED
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
MODE
TEST CONDITIONS
IDDIO
IDDA
TYP(3)
IDD
IDDIO
IDDA
TYP(3)
MAX
MAX
TYP(3)
MAX
TYP(3)
MAX
TYP(3)
MAX
The following peripheral clocks are
enabled:
•
ePWM1, ePWM2, ePWM3,
ePWM4, ePWM5, ePWM6,
ePWM7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
eCAP1
eQEP1
eCAN-A
CLA
SCI-A, SCI-B, SCI-C
SPI-A
Operational
(Flash)
100 mA(6)
40 mA
90 mA(6)
17 mA
40 mA
ADC
I2C-A
COMPA1, COMPA3,
COMPB1, COMPA6,
COMPB4, COMPB5,
COMPB7
•
CPU-TIMER0,
CPU-TIMER1,
CPU-TIMER2
All PWM pins are toggled at 60 kHz.
All I/O pins are left unconnected.(4)(5)
Code is running out of flash with
2 wait-states.
XCLKOUT is turned off.
Flash is powered down.
IDLE
XCLKOUT is turned off.
All peripheral clocks are turned off.
13 mA
4 mA
15 μA
15 μA
15 μA
13 mA
4 mA
300 μA
300 μA
150 μA
15 μA
15 μA
15 μA
Flash is powered down.
Peripheral clocks are off.
STANDBY
HALT
Flash is powered down.
Peripheral clocks are off.
Input clock is disabled.(7)
30 μA
15 μA
(1) IDDIO current is dependent on the electrical loading on the I/O pins.
(2) In order to realize the IDDA currents shown for IDLE, STANDBY, and HALT, clock to the ADC module must be turned off explicitly by
writing to the PCLKCR0 register.
(3) The TYP numbers are applicable over room temperature and nominal voltage.
(4) The following is done in a loop:
•
•
•
•
•
Data is continuously transmitted out of SPI-A, SCI-A, SCI-B, SCI-C, eCAN-A, and I2C-A ports.
The hardware multiplier is exercised.
Watchdog is reset.
ADC is performing continuous conversion.
GPIO17 is toggled.
(5) CLA is continuously performing polynomial calculations.
(6) For F2805x devices that do not have CLA, subtract the IDD current number for CLA (see Table 4-2) from the IDD (VREG disabled)/IDDIO
(VREG enabled) current numbers shown in Table 4-1 for operational mode.
(7) If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the HALT mode shuts down the on-chip crystal oscillator.
NOTE
The peripheral-I/O multiplexing implemented in the device prevents all available peripherals
from being used at the same time because more than one peripheral function may share an
I/O pin. It is, however, possible to turn on the clocks to all the peripherals at the same time,
although such a configuration is not useful. If the clocks to all the peripherals are turned on
at the same time, the current drawn by the device will be more than the numbers specified in
the current consumption tables.
52
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
4.4.1 Reducing Current Consumption
The 2805x devices incorporate a method to reduce the device current consumption. Since each peripheral
unit has an individual clock-enable bit, significant reduction in current consumption can be achieved by
turning off the clock to any peripheral module that is not used in a given application. Furthermore, any one
of the three low-power modes could be taken advantage of to reduce the current consumption even
further. Table 4-2 indicates the typical reduction in current consumption achieved by turning off the clocks.
Table 4-2. Typical Current Consumption by Various
Peripherals (at 60 MHz)(1)
PERIPHERAL
MODULE(2)
IDD CURRENT
REDUCTION (mA)
ADC
2(3)
I2C
3
ePWM
2
eCAP
2
eQEP
2
SCI
2
SPI
COMP/DAC
PGA
2
1
2
CPU-TIMER
Internal zero-pin oscillator
CAN
1
0.5
2.5
20
CLA
(1) All peripheral clocks (except CPU Timer clock) are disabled upon
reset. Writing to or reading from peripheral registers is possible only
after the peripheral clocks are turned on.
(2) For peripherals with multiple instances, the current quoted is per
module. For example, the 2 mA value quoted for ePWM is for one
ePWM module.
(3) This number represents the current drawn by the digital portion of
the ADC module. Turning off the clock to the ADC module results in
the elimination of the current drawn by the analog portion of the ADC
(IDDA) as well.
NOTE
IDDIO current consumption is reduced by 15 mA (typical) when XCLKOUT is turned off.
NOTE
The baseline IDD current (current when the core is executing a dummy loop with no
peripherals enabled) is 40 mA, typical. To arrive at the IDD current for a given application, the
current-drawn by the peripherals (enabled by that application) must be added to the baseline
IDD current.
Following are other methods to reduce power consumption further:
•
The flash module may be powered down if code is run off SARAM. This method results in a current
reduction of 18 mA (typical) in the VDD rail and 13 mA (typical) in the VDDIO rail.
•
Savings in IDDIO may be realized by disabling the pullups on pins that assume an output function.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Operating Conditions
53
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
4.4.2 Current Consumption Graphs (VREG Enabled)
Operational Current vs Frequency
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
SYSCLKOUT (MHz)
IDDIO IDDA
Figure 4-1. Typical Operational Current Versus Frequency (F2805x)
Operational Power vs Frequency
500
450
400
350
300
250
200
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
SYSCLKOUT (MHz)
Figure 4-2. Typical Operational Power Versus Frequency (F2805x)
54
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Typical CLA operational current vs SYSCLKOUT
25
20
15
10
5
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
SYSCLKOUT (MHz)
Figure 4-3. Typical CLA Operational Current Versus SYSCLKOUT
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Operating Conditions
55
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
4.5 Flash Timing
Table 4-3. Flash/OTP Endurance for T Temperature Material(1)
ERASE/PROGRAM
TEMPERATURE
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Nf
Flash endurance for the array (write/erase cycles)
OTP endurance for the array (write cycles)
0°C to 105°C (ambient)
0°C to 30°C (ambient)
20000
50000
cycles
write
NOTP
1
(1) Write/erase operations outside of the temperature ranges indicated are not specified and may affect the endurance numbers.
Table 4-4. Flash/OTP Endurance for S Temperature Material(1)
ERASE/PROGRAM
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
TEMPERATURE
0°C to 125°C (ambient)
0°C to 30°C (ambient)
Nf
Flash endurance for the array (write/erase cycles)
OTP endurance for the array (write cycles)
20000
50000
cycles
write
NOTP
1
(1) Write/erase operations outside of the temperature ranges indicated are not specified and may affect the endurance numbers.
Table 4-5. Flash Parameters at 60-MHz SYSCLKOUT
TEST
CONDITIONS
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Program Time 16-Bit Word
8K Sector
50
250
125
2
μs
ms
ms
s
4K Sector
Erase Time(1) 8K Sector
4K Sector
2
s
(2)
IDDP
VDD current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
VDDIO current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
VDDIO current consumption during Erase/Program cycle
VREG disabled
VREG enabled
80
mA
(2)
(2)
IDDIOP
IDDIOP
60
120
mA
(1) The on-chip flash memory is in an erased state when the device is shipped from TI. As such, erasing the flash memory is not required
prior to programming, when programming the device for the first time. However, the erase operation is needed on all subsequent
programming operations.
(2) Typical parameters as seen at room temperature including function call overhead, with all peripherals off.
Table 4-6. Flash/OTP Access Timing
PARAMETER
MIN
40
MAX UNIT
ta(fp)
Paged Flash access time
Random Flash access time
OTP access time
ns
ns
ns
ta(fr)
40
ta(OTP)
60
Table 4-7. Flash Data Retention Duration
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
TJ = 55°C
MIN
15
MAX UNIT
tretention
Data retention duration
years
56
Device Operating Conditions
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 4-8. Minimum Required Flash/OTP Wait-States at Different Frequencies
SYSCLKOUT
SYSCLKOUT
(ns)
PAGE
RANDOM
OTP
WAIT-STATE
(MHz)
WAIT-STATE(1)
WAIT-STATE(1)
60
16.67
18.18
20
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
55
50
45
22.22
25
40
35
28.57
33.33
30
(1) Page and random wait-state must be ≥ 1.
The equations to compute the Flash page wait-state and random wait-state in Table 4-8 are as follows:
é
ê
ë
ù
æ
ç
ç
è
ö
÷
÷
ø
ta(f ·p)
Flash Page Wait State =
-1 round up to the next highest integer
ú
tc(SCO)
ê
ú
û
é
ê
ë
ù
æ
ç
ç
è
ö
÷
÷
ø
ta(f ×r)
Flash Random Wait State =
-1 round up to the next highest integer, or 1, whichever is larger
ú
tc(SCO)
ê
ú
û
The equation to compute the OTP wait-state in Table 4-8 is as follows:
é
ê
ë
ù
æ
ç
ç
è
ö
÷
÷
ø
ta(OTP)
OTP Wait State =
-1 round up to the next highest integer, or 1, whichever is larger
ú
tc(SCO)
ê
ú
û
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device Operating Conditions
57
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
5 Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
5.1 Power Sequencing
There is no power sequencing requirement needed to ensure the device is in the proper state after reset
or to prevent the I/Os from glitching during power up or power down (GPIO19, GPIO34–38 do not have
glitch-free I/Os). No voltage larger than a diode drop (0.7 V) above VDDIO should be applied to any digital
pin (for analog pins, this value is 0.7 V above VDDA) prior to powering up the device. Voltages applied to
pins on an unpowered device can bias internal p-n junctions in unintended ways and produce
unpredictable results.
VDDIO, VDDA
(3.3 V)
VDD (1.8 V)
INTOSC1
tINTOSCST
X1/X2
tOSCST
(B)
(A)
XCLKOUT
User-code dependent
t
w(RSL1)
XRS(D)
Address/data valid, internal boot-ROM code execution phase
Address/Data/
Control
(Internal)
User-code execution phase
User-code dependent
t
d(EX)
(C)
h(boot-mode)
t
Boot-Mode
Pins
GPIO pins as input
Peripheral/GPIO function
Boot-ROM execution starts
(E)
Based on boot code
GPIO pins as input (state depends on internal PU/PD)
I/O Pins
User-code dependent
A. Upon power up, SYSCLKOUT is OSCCLK/4. Since the XCLKOUTDIV bits in the XCLK register come up with a reset
state of 0, SYSCLKOUT is further divided by 4 before SYSCLKOUT appears at XCLKOUT. XCLKOUT = OSCCLK/16
during this phase.
B. Boot ROM configures the DIVSEL bits for /1 operation. XCLKOUT = OSCCLK/4 during this phase. Note that
XCLKOUT will not be visible at the pin until explicitly configured by user code.
C. After reset, the boot ROM code samples Boot Mode pins. Based on the status of the Boot Mode pin, the boot code
branches to destination memory or boot code function. If boot ROM code executes after power-on conditions (in
debugger environment), the boot code execution time is based on the current SYSCLKOUT speed. The SYSCLKOUT
will be based on user environment and could be with or without PLL enabled.
D. Using the XRS pin is optional due to the on-chip power-on reset (POR) circuitry.
E. The internal pullup or pulldown will take effect when BOR is driven high.
Figure 5-1. Power-on Reset
58
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 5-1. Reset (XRS) Timing Requirements
MIN
1000tc(SCO)
32tc(OSCCLK)
MAX
UNIT
cycles
cycles
th(boot-mode)
tw(RSL2)
Hold time for boot-mode pins
Pulse duration, XRS low on warm reset
Table 5-2. Reset (XRS) Switching Characteristics
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
μs
tw(RSL1)
tw(WDRS)
td(EX)
Pulse duration, XRS driven by device
600
Pulse duration, reset pulse generated by watchdog
Delay time, address/data valid after XRS high
Start up time, internal zero-pin oscillator
On-chip crystal-oscillator start-up time
512tc(OSCCLK)
cycles
cycles
μs
32tc(OSCCLK)
tINTOSCST
3
(1)
tOSCST
1
10
ms
(1) Dependent on crystal/resonator and board design.
INTOSC1
X1/X2
XCLKOUT
User-Code Dependent
t
w(RSL2)
XRS
User-Code Execution Phase
t
d(EX)
Address/Data/
User-Code Execution
Control
(Internal)
(A)
t
Boot-ROM Execution Starts
GPIO Pins as Input
h(boot-mode)
Boot-Mode
Pins
Peripheral/GPIO Function
User-Code Dependent
Peripheral/GPIO Function
User-Code Execution Starts
I/O Pins
GPIO Pins as Input (State Depends on Internal PU/PD)
User-Code Dependent
A. After reset, the Boot ROM code samples BOOT Mode pins. Based on the status of the Boot Mode pin, the boot code
branches to destination memory or boot code function. If Boot ROM code executes after power-on conditions (in
debugger environment), the Boot code execution time is based on the current SYSCLKOUT speed. The
SYSCLKOUT will be based on user environment and could be with or without PLL enabled.
Figure 5-2. Warm Reset
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
59
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Figure 5-3 shows an example for the effect of writing into PLLCR register. In the first phase, PLLCR =
0x0004 and SYSCLKOUT = OSCCLK x 2. The PLLCR is then written with 0x0008. Right after the PLLCR
register is written, the PLL lock-up phase begins. During this phase, SYSCLKOUT = OSCCLK/2. After the
PLL lock-up is complete, SYSCLKOUT reflects the new operating frequency, OSCCLK x 4.
OSCCLK
Write to PLLCR
SYSCLKOUT
OSCCLK * 2
OSCCLK/2
OSCCLK * 4
(CPU frequency while PLL is stabilizing
with the desired frequency. This period
(PLL lock-up time tp) is 1 ms long.)
(Current CPU
Frequency)
(Changed CPU frequency)
Figure 5-3. Example of Effect of Writing Into PLLCR Register
5.2 Clocking
5.2.1 Device Clock Table
This section provides the timing requirements and switching characteristics for the various clock options
available on the 2805x MCUs. Table 5-3 lists the cycle times of various clocks.
Table 5-3. 2805x Clock Table and Nomenclature (60-MHz Devices)
MIN
16.67
2
NOM
MAX UNIT
tc(SCO), Cycle time
Frequency
500
60
ns
MHz
ns
SYSCLKOUT
LSPCLK(1)
ADC clock
tc(LCO), Cycle time
Frequency
16.67
66.67(2)
15(2)
60
60
MHz
ns
tc(ADCCLK), Cycle time
Frequency
16.67
MHz
(1) Lower LSPCLK will reduce device power consumption.
(2) This value is the default reset value if SYSCLKOUT = 60 MHz.
Table 5-4. Device Clocking Requirements/Characteristics
MIN
NOM
MAX UNIT
tc(OSC), Cycle time
Frequency
50
5
200
20
ns
MHz
ns
On-chip oscillator (X1/X2 pins)
(Crystal/Resonator)
tc(CI), Cycle time (C8)
Frequency
33.3
5
200
30
External oscillator/clock source
(XCLKIN pin) — PLL Enabled
MHz
ns
tc(CI), Cycle time (C8)
Frequency
33.33
4
250
30
External oscillator/clock source
(XCLKIN pin) — PLL Disabled
MHz
Limp mode SYSCLKOUT
(with /2 enabled)
Frequency range
1 to 5
MHz
tc(XCO), Cycle time (C1)
66.67
0.5
2000
15
ns
MHz
ms
XCLKOUT
Frequency
tp
PLL lock time(1)
1
(1) The PLLLOCKPRD register must be updated based on the number of OSCCLK cycles. If the zero-pin internal oscillators (10 MHz) are
used as the clock source, then the PLLLOCKPRD register must be written with a value of 10,000 (minimum).
60
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 5-5. Internal Zero-Pin Oscillator (INTOSC1, INTOSC2) Characteristics
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
10.000
10.000
55
MAX UNIT
MHz
Internal zero-pin oscillator 1 (INTOSC1) at 30°C(1)(2)
Internal zero-pin oscillator 2 (INTOSC2) at 30°C(1)(2)
Step size (coarse trim)
Frequency
Frequency
MHz
kHz
Step size (fine trim)
14
kHz
Temperature drift(3)
Voltage (VDD) drift(3)
3.03
4.85 kHz/°C
Hz/mV
175
(1) In order to achieve better oscillator accuracy (10 MHz ± 1% or better) than shown, see the Oscillator Compensation Guide Application
Report (literature number SPRAB84). Refer to Figure 5-4 for TYP and MAX values.
(2) Frequency range ensured only when VREG is enabled, VREGENZ = VSS
.
(3) Output frequency of the internal oscillators follows the direction of both the temperature gradient and voltage (VDD) gradient. For
example:
•
•
Increase in temperature will cause the output frequency to increase per the temperature coefficient.
Decrease in voltage (VDD) will cause the output frequency to decrease per the voltage coefficient.
Zero-Pin Oscillator Frequency Movement With Temperature
10.6
10.5
10.4
10.3
10.2
10.1
10
9.9
9.8
9.7
9.6
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
Typical
Max
Temperature (°C)
Figure 5-4. Zero-Pin Oscillator Frequency Movement With Temperature
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
61
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
5.2.2 Clock Requirements and Characteristics
Table 5-6. XCLKIN Timing Requirements - PLL Enabled
NO.
MIN
MAX UNIT
C9
tf(CI)
Fall time, XCLKIN
6
6
ns
ns
%
%
C10 tr(CI)
Rise time, XCLKIN
C11 tw(CIL)
C12 tw(CIH)
Pulse duration, XCLKIN low as a percentage of tc(OSCCLK)
Pulse duration, XCLKIN high as a percentage of tc(OSCCLK)
45
45
55
55
Table 5-7. XCLKIN Timing Requirements - PLL Disabled
NO.
MIN
MAX UNIT
C9
tf(CI)
Fall time, XCLKIN
Rise time, XCLKIN
Up to 20 MHz
6
2
ns
20 MHz to 30 MHz
Up to 20 MHz
C10 tr(CI)
6
ns
20 MHz to 30 MHz
2
C11 tw(CIL)
C12 tw(CIH)
Pulse duration, XCLKIN low as a percentage of tc(OSCCLK)
Pulse duration, XCLKIN high as a percentage of tc(OSCCLK)
45
45
55
55
%
%
The possible configuration modes are shown in Table 2-22.
Table 5-8. XCLKOUT Switching Characteristics (PLL Bypassed or Enabled)(1) (2)
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
NO.
C3
C4
C5
C6
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
5
UNIT
ns
tf(XCO)
Fall time, XCLKOUT
Rise time, XCLKOUT
tr(XCO)
5
ns
tw(XCOL)
tw(XCOH)
Pulse duration, XCLKOUT low
Pulse duration, XCLKOUT high
H – 2
H – 2
H + 2
H + 2
ns
ns
(1) A load of 40 pF is assumed for these parameters.
(2) H = 0.5tc(XCO)
C10
C9
C8
(A)
XCLKIN
C6
C3
C1
C4
C5
(B)
XCLKOUT
A. The relationship of XCLKIN to XCLKOUT depends on the divide factor chosen. The waveform relationship shown is
intended to illustrate the timing parameters only and may differ based on actual configuration.
B. XCLKOUT configured to reflect SYSCLKOUT.
Figure 5-5. Clock Timing
62
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
5.3 Interrupts
Figure 5-6 shows how the various interrupt sources are multiplexed.
Peripherals
(SPI, SCI, ePWM, I2C,
eCAP, ADC, eQEP, CLA, eCAN)
WDINT
Watchdog
Low Power Modes
WAKEINT
Sync
LPMINT
XINT1
SYSCLKOUT
XINT1
Interrupt Control
XINT1CR(15:0)
XINT2CTR(15:0)
GPIOXINT1SEL(4:0)
XINT2SOC
ADC
INT1
to
INT12
XINT2
XINT2
Interrupt Control
XINT2CR(15:0)
XINT3CTR(15:0)
C28
Core
GPIOXINT2SEL(4:0)
GPIO0.int
XINT3
TINT0
XINT3
GPIO
MUX
Interrupt Control
XINT3CR(15:0)
XINT3CTR(15:0)
GPIO31.int
GPIOXINT3SEL(4:0)
CPU TIMER 0
CPU TIMER 1
CPU TIMER 2
TINT1
TINT2
INT13
INT14
CPUTMR2CLK
CLOCKFAIL
NMIRS
System Control
(See the System
Control section.)
NMI interrupt with watchdog function
(See the NMI Watchdog section.)
NMI
Figure 5-6. External and PIE Interrupt Sources
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
63
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Eight PIE block interrupts are grouped into one CPU interrupt. In total, 12 CPU interrupt groups, with
8 interrupts per group equals 96 possible interrupts. Table 5-9 shows the interrupts used by 2805x
devices.
The TRAP #VectorNumber instruction transfers program control to the interrupt service routine
corresponding to the vector specified. TRAP #0 attempts to transfer program control to the address
pointed to by the reset vector. The PIE vector table does not, however, include a reset vector. Therefore,
TRAP #0 should not be used when the PIE is enabled. Doing so will result in undefined behavior.
When the PIE is enabled, TRAP #1 through TRAP #12 will transfer program control to the interrupt service
routine corresponding to the first vector within the PIE group. For example: TRAP #1 fetches the vector
from INT1.1, TRAP #2 fetches the vector from INT2.1, and so forth.
IFR[12:1]
IER[12:1]
INTM
INT1
INT2
1
CPU
MUX
0
INT11
INT12
Global
Enable
(Flag)
(Enable)
INTx.1
INTx.2
INTx.3
INTx.4
INTx.5
From
Peripherals
or
External
Interrupts
INTx
MUX
INTx.6
INTx.7
INTx.8
PIEACKx
(Enable)
(Flag)
(Enable/Flag)
PIEIERx[8:1]
PIEIFRx[8:1]
Figure 5-7. Multiplexing of Interrupts Using the PIE Block
64
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 5-9. PIE MUXed Peripheral Interrupt Vector Table(1)
INTx.8
WAKEINT
(LPM/WD)
0xD4E
Reserved
–
INTx.7
TINT0
INTx.6
ADCINT9
(ADC)
INTx.5
XINT2
INTx.4
XINT1
INTx.3
Reserved
–
INTx.2
ADCINT2
(ADC)
INTx.1
ADCINT1
(ADC)
INT1.y
INT2.y
INT3.y
INT4.y
INT5.y
INT6.y
INT7.y
INT8.y
INT9.y
INT10.y
(TIMER 0)
0xD4C
EPWM7_TZINT
(ePWM7)
0xD5C
EPWM7_INT
(ePWM7)
0xD6C
Reserved
–
Ext. int. 2
0xD48
Ext. int. 1
0xD46
0xD4A
0xD44
0xD42
0xD40
EPWM6_TZINT
(ePWM6)
0xD5A
EPWM5_TZINT
(ePWM5)
0xD58
EPWM4_TZINT
(ePWM4)
0xD56
EPWM3_TZINT
(ePWM3)
0xD54
EPWM2_TZINT
(ePWM2)
0xD52
EPWM1_TZINT
(ePWM1)
0xD50
0xD5E
Reserved
–
EPWM6_INT
(ePWM6)
0xD6A
EPWM5_INT
(ePWM5)
0xD68
EPWM4_INT
(ePWM4)
0xD66
EPWM3_INT
(ePWM3)
0xD64
EPWM2_INT
(ePWM2)
0xD62
EPWM1_INT
(ePWM1)
0xD60
0xD6E
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
ECAP1_INT
(eCAP1)
0xD70
0xD7E
Reserved
–
0xD7C
Reserved
–
0xD7A
0xD78
0xD76
0xD74
0xD72
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
EQEP1_INT
(eQEP1)
0xD80
0xD8E
Reserved
–
0xD8C
Reserved
–
0xD8A
0xD88
0xD86
0xD84
0xD82
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
SPITXINTA
(SPI-A)
0xD92
SPIRXINTA
(SPI-A)
0xD9E
Reserved
–
0xD9C
Reserved
–
0xD9A
0xD98
0xD96
0xD94
0xD90
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
0xDAE
Reserved
–
0xDAC
Reserved
–
0xDAA
0xDA8
0xDA6
0xDA4
Reserved
–
0xDA2
0xDA0
SCITXINTC
(SCI-C)
0xDBA
SCIRXINTC
(SCI-C)
0xDB8
Reserved
–
I2CINT2A
(I2C-A)
0xDB2
I2CINT1A
(I2C-A)
0xDBE
Reserved
–
0xDBC
Reserved
–
0xDB6
0xDB4
SCIRXINTB
(SCI-B)
0xDC4
ADCINT3
(ADC)
0xDB0
ECAN1_INTA
(CAN-A)
0xDCA
ECAN0_INTA
(CAN-A)
0xDC8
SCITXINTB
(SCI-B)
0xDC6
ADCINT4
(ADC)
SCITXINTA
(SCI-A)
0xDC2
SCIRXINTA
(SCI-A)
0xDCE
ADCINT8
(ADC)
(ePWM16)
0xDDE
CLA1_INT8
(CLA)
0xDCC
ADCINT7
(ADC)
0xDC0
ADCINT6
(ADC)
ADCINT5
(ADC)
ADCINT2
(ADC)
ADCINT1
(ADC)
(ePWM15)
0xDDC
CLA1_INT7
(CLA)
(ePWM14)
0xDDA
(ePWM13)
0xDD8
(ePWM12)
0xDD6
CLA1_INT4
(CLA)
(ePWM11)
0xDD4
CLA1_INT3
(CLA)
(ePWM10)
0xDD2
(ePWM9)
0xDD0
INT11.y
INT12.y
CLA1_INT6
(CLA)
CLA1_INT5
(CLA)
CLA1_INT2
(CLA)
CLA1_INT1
(CLA)
(ePWM16)
0xDEE
LUF
(ePWM15)
0xDEC
LVF
(ePWM14)
0xDEA
(ePWM13)
0xDE8
(ePWM12)
0xDE6
(ePWM11)
0xDE4
Reserved
–
(ePWM10)
0xDE2
(ePWM9)
0xDE0
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
Reserved
–
XINT3
(CLA)
(CLA)
Ext. Int. 3
0xDF0
0xDFE
0xDFC
0xDFA
0xDF8
0xDF6
0xDF4
0xDF2
(1) Out of 96 possible interrupts, some interrupts are not used. These interrupts are reserved for future devices. These interrupts can be
used as software interrupts if they are enabled at the PIEIFRx level, provided none of the interrupts within the group is being used by a
peripheral. Otherwise, interrupts coming in from peripherals may be lost by accidentally clearing their flag while modifying the PIEIFR.
To summarize, there are two safe cases when the reserved interrupts could be used as software interrupts:
•
•
No peripheral within the group is asserting interrupts.
No peripheral interrupts are assigned to the group (for example, PIE group 7).
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
65
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 5-10. PIE Configuration and Control Registers
NAME
PIECTRL
PIEACK
PIEIER1
PIEIFR1
PIEIER2
PIEIFR2
PIEIER3
PIEIFR3
PIEIER4
PIEIFR4
PIEIER5
PIEIFR5
PIEIER6
PIEIFR6
PIEIER7
PIEIFR7
PIEIER8
PIEIFR8
PIEIER9
PIEIFR9
PIEIER10
PIEIFR10
PIEIER11
PIEIFR11
PIEIER12
PIEIFR12
Reserved
ADDRESS
0x0CE0
0x0CE1
0x0CE2
0x0CE3
0x0CE4
0x0CE5
0x0CE6
0x0CE7
0x0CE8
0x0CE9
0x0CEA
0x0CEB
0x0CEC
0x0CED
0x0CEE
0x0CEF
0x0CF0
0x0CF1
0x0CF2
0x0CF3
0x0CF4
0x0CF5
0x0CF6
0x0CF7
0x0CF8
0x0CF9
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION(1)
PIE, Control Register
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
PIE, Acknowledge Register
PIE, INT1 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT1 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT2 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT2 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT3 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT3 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT4 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT4 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT5 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT5 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT6 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT6 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT7 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT7 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT8 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT8 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT9 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT9 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT10 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT10 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT11 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT11 Group Flag Register
PIE, INT12 Group Enable Register
PIE, INT12 Group Flag Register
Reserved
0x0CFA –
0x0CFF
(1) The PIE configuration and control registers are not protected by EALLOW mode. The PIE vector table
is protected.
66
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
5.3.1 External Interrupts
Table 5-11. External Interrupt Registers
NAME
XINT1CR
XINT2CR
XINT3CR
XINT1CTR
XINT2CTR
XINT3CTR
ADDRESS
0x00 7070
0x00 7071
0x00 7072
0x00 7078
0x00 7079
0x00 707A
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION
XINT1 configuration register
XINT2 configuration register
XINT3 configuration register
XINT1 counter register
1
1
1
1
1
1
XINT2 counter register
XINT3 counter register
Each external interrupt can be enabled, disabled, or qualified using positive, negative, or both positive and
negative edge. For more information, see the System Control and Interrupts chapter of the
TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical Reference Manual (literature number SPRUHE5).
5.3.1.1 External Interrupt Electrical Data/Timing
Table 5-12. External Interrupt Timing Requirements(1)
TEST CONDITIONS
Synchronous
MIN
1tc(SCO)
MAX
UNIT
cycles
cycles
(2)
tw(INT)
Pulse duration, INT input low/high
With qualifier
1tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-45.
(2) This timing is applicable to any GPIO pin configured for ADCSOC functionality.
Table 5-13. External Interrupt Switching Characteristics(1)
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
tw(IQSW) + 12tc(SCO)
UNIT
td(INT)
Delay time, INT low/high to interrupt-vector fetch
cycles
(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-45.
t
w(INT)
XINT1, XINT2, XINT3
t
d(INT)
Address bus
(internal)
Interrupt Vector
Figure 5-8. External Interrupt Timing
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Power, Reset, Clocking, and Interrupts
67
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6 Peripheral Information and Timings
6.1 Parameter Information
6.1.1 Timing Parameter Symbology
Timing parameter symbols used are created in accordance with JEDEC Standard 100. To shorten the
symbols, some of the pin names and other related terminology have been abbreviated as follows:
Lowercase subscripts and their
meanings:
Letters and symbols and their
meanings:
a
c
d
access time
H
L
High
Low
cycle time (period)
delay time
V
Valid
Unknown, changing, or don't care
level
f
fall time
X
Z
h
r
hold time
High impedance
rise time
su
t
setup time
transition time
valid time
v
w
pulse duration (width)
6.1.1.1 General Notes on Timing Parameters
All output signals from the 28x devices (including XCLKOUT) are derived from an internal clock such that
all output transitions for a given half-cycle occur with a minimum of skewing relative to each other.
The signal combinations shown in the following timing diagrams may not necessarily represent actual
cycles. For actual cycle examples, see the appropriate cycle description section of this document.
6.1.2 Test Load Circuit
This test load circuit is used to measure all switching characteristics provided in this document.
Tester Pin Electronics
Data Sheet Timing Reference Point
W
3.5 nH
Output
Under
Test
42
Transmission Line
(A)
Z0 = 50 W
Device Pin(B)
4.0 pF
1.85 pF
A. Input requirements in this data sheet are tested with an input slew rate of < 4 Volts per nanosecond (4 V/ns) at the
device pin.
B. The data sheet provides timing at the device pin. For output timing analysis, the tester pin electronics and its
transmission line effects must be taken into account. A transmission line with a delay of 2 ns or longer can be used to
produce the desired transmission line effect. The transmission line is intended as a load only. It is not necessary to
add or subtract the transmission line delay (2 ns or longer) from the data sheet timing.
Figure 6-1. 3.3-V Test Load Circuit
68
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.2 Control Law Accelerator (CLA)
6.2.1 Control Law Accelerator Device-Specific Information
The control law accelerator extends the capabilities of the C28x CPU by adding parallel processing. Time-
critical control loops serviced by the CLA can achieve low ADC sample to output delay. Thus, the CLA
enables faster system response and higher frequency control loops. Utilizing the CLA for time-critical tasks
frees up the main CPU to perform other system and communication functions concurently. The following is
a list of major features of the CLA.
•
•
Clocked at the same rate as the main CPU (SYSCLKOUT).
An independent architecture allowing CLA algorithm execution independent of the main C28x CPU.
–
Complete bus architecture:
•
•
Program address bus and program data bus
Data address bus, data read bus, and data write bus
–
–
–
–
–
Independent eight-stage pipeline.
12-bit program counter (MPC)
Four 32-bit result registers (MR0–MR3)
Two 16-bit auxillary registers (MAR0, MAR1)
Status register (MSTF)
•
Instruction set includes:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
IEEE single-precision (32-bit) floating-point math operations
Floating-point math with parallel load or store
Floating-point multiply with parallel add or subtract
1/X and 1/sqrt(X) estimations
Data type conversions.
Conditional branch and call
Data load and store operations
•
•
The CLA program code can consist of up to eight tasks or interrupt service routines.
–
–
–
–
–
The start address of each task is specified by the MVECT registers.
No limit on task size as long as the tasks fit within the CLA program memory space.
One task is serviced at a time through to completion. There is no nesting of tasks.
Upon task completion, a task-specific interrupt is flagged within the PIE.
When a task finishes, the next highest-priority pending task is automatically started.
Task trigger mechanisms:
–
–
C28x CPU via the IACK instruction
Task1 to Task7: the corresponding ADC, ePWM, eQEP, or eCAP module interrupt. For example:
•
•
•
•
Task1: ADCINT1 or EPWM1_INT
Task2: ADCINT2 or EPWM2_INT
Task4: ADCINT4 or EPWM4_INT or EQEPx_INT or ECAPx_INT
Task7: ADCINT7 or EPWM7_INT or EQEPx_INT or ECAPx_INT
–
Task8: ADCINT8 or by CPU Timer 0 or EQEPx_INT or ECAPx_INT
•
Memory and Shared Peripherals:
–
–
–
Two dedicated message RAMs for communication between the CLA and the main CPU.
The C28x CPU can map CLA program and data memory to the main CPU space or CLA space.
The CLA has direct access to the CLA Data ROM that stores the math tables required by the
routines in the CLA Math Library.
–
The CLA has direct access to the ADC Result registers, comparator and DAC registers, eCAP,
eQEP, and ePWM registers.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
69
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Peripheral Interrupts
IACK
CLA Control
Registers
ADCINT1 to ADCINT8
EPWM1_INT to EPWM7_INT
ECAP1_INT
CLA_INT1 to CLA_INT8
MIFR
MIOVF
MICLR
MICLROVF
MIFRC
MIER
Main
28x
CPU
INT11
INT12
MPERINT1
to
MPERINT8
PIE
EQEP1_INT
LVF
LUF
CPU Timer 0
MIRUN
Main CPU Read/Write Data Bus
MPISRCSEL1
MVECT1
MVECT2
MVECT3
MVECT4
MVECT5
MVECT6
MVECT7
MVECT8
CLA Program Address Bus
CLA Program Data Bus
CLA
Program
Memory
CLA
Data
Memory
Map to CLA or
CPU Space
Map to CLA or
CPU Space
MMEMCFG
MCTL
SYSCLKOUT
CLAENCLK
SYSRS
CLA
Data
ROM
CLA
Shared
Message
RAMs
MEALLOW
CLA Execution
Registers
CLA Data Read Address Bus
ADC
Result
Registers
MPC(12)
MSTF(32)
MR0(32)
MR1(32)
MR2(32)
MR3(32)
CLA Data Read Data Bus
CLA Data Write Address Bus
CLA Data Write Data Bus
Main CPU Read Data Bus
eCAP
Registers
MAR0(32)
MAR1(32)
eQEP
Registers
ePWM
Registers
Comparator
+ DAC
Registers
Figure 6-2. CLA Block Diagram
70
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.2.2 Control Law Accelerator Register Descriptions
Table 6-1. CLA Control Registers
CLA1
ADDRESS
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION(1)
MVECT1
MVECT2
MVECT3
MVECT4
MVECT5
MVECT6
MVECT7
MVECT8
MCTL
0x1400
0x1401
0x1402
0x1403
0x1404
0x1405
0x1406
0x1407
0x1410
0x1411
0x1414
0x1420
0x1421
0x1422
0x1423
0x1424
0x1425
0x1426
0x1428
0x142A
0x142B
0x142E
0x1430
0x1434
0x1438
0x143C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
CLA Interrupt/Task 1 Start Address
CLA Interrupt/Task 2 Start Address
CLA Interrupt/Task 3 Start Address
CLA Interrupt/Task 4 Start Address
CLA Interrupt/Task 5 Start Address
CLA Interrupt/Task 6 Start Address
CLA Interrupt/Task 7 Start Address
CLA Interrupt/Task 8 Start Address
CLA Control Register
MMEMCFG
MPISRCSEL1
MIFR
CLA Memory Configure Register
Peripheral Interrupt Source Select Register 1
Interrupt Flag Register
MIOVF
Interrupt Overflow Register
Interrupt Force Register
MIFRC
MICLR
Interrupt Clear Register
MICLROVF
MIER
Interrupt Overflow Clear Register
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt RUN Register
MIRUN
MPC(2)
MAR0(2)
MAR1(2)
MSTF(2)
MR0(2)
MR1(2)
MR2(2)
MR3(2)
CLA Program Counter
–
CLA Aux Register 0
–
CLA Aux Register 1
–
CLA STF Register
–
CLA R0H Register
–
CLA R1H Register
–
CLA R2H Register
–
CLA R3H Register
(1) All registers in this table are DCSM protected
(2) The main C28x CPU has read only access to this register for debug purposes. The main CPU cannot perform CPU or debugger writes
to this register.
Table 6-2. CLA Message RAM
ADDRESS RANGE
0x1480 – 0x14FF
0x1500 – 0x157F
SIZE (x16)
128
DESCRIPTION
CLA to CPU Message RAM
CPU to CLA Message RAM
128
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
71
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.3 Analog Block
6.3.1 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)
6.3.1.1 Analog-to-Digital Converter Device-Specific Information
The core of the ADC contains a single 12-bit converter fed by two sample-and-hold circuits. The sample-
and-hold circuits can be sampled simultaneously or sequentially. These, in turn, are fed by a total of up to
16 analog input channels. The converter can be configured to run with an internal bandgap reference to
create true-voltage based conversions or with a pair of external voltage references (VREFHI/VREFLO) to
create ratiometric-based conversions.
Contrary to previous ADC types, this ADC is not sequencer-based. The user can easily create a series of
conversions from a single trigger. However, the basic principle of operation is centered around the
configurations of individual conversions, called SOCs, or Start-Of-Conversions.
Functions of the ADC module include:
•
•
•
12-bit ADC core with built-in dual sample-and-hold (S/H)
Simultaneous sampling or sequential sampling modes
Full range analog input: 0 V to 3.3 V fixed, or VREFHI/VREFLO ratiometric. The digital value of the input
analog voltage is derived by:
–
Internal Reference (VREFLO = VSSA. VREFHI must not exceed VDDA when using either internal or
external reference modes.)
Digital Value = 0,
when input £ 0 V
Input Analog Voltage -
VREFLO
Digital Value = 4096 ´
when 0 V < input < 3.3 V
3.3
Digital Value = 4095,
when input ³ 3.3 V
–
External Reference (VREFHI/VREFLO connected to external references. VREFHI must not exceed VDDA
when using either internal or external reference modes.)
Digital Value = 0,
when input £ 0 V
Input Analog Voltage -
VREFLO
Digital Value = 4096 ´
when 0 V < input <
VREFHI
-
VREFHI VREFLO
Digital Value = 4095,
when input ³
VREFHI
•
•
•
•
•
Runs at full system clock, no prescaling required
Up to 16-channel, multiplexed inputs
16 SOCs, configurable for trigger, sample window, and channel
16 result registers (individually addressable) to store conversion values
Multiple trigger sources
–
–
–
–
–
S/W – software immediate start
ePWM 1–7
GPIO XINT2
CPU Timer 0, CPU Timer 1, CPU Timer 2
ADCINT1, ADCINT2
•
9 flexible PIE interrupts, can configure interrupt request after any conversion
72
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 6-3. ADC Configuration and Control Registers
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
ADCCTL1
0x7100
0x7101
0x7104
0x7105
0x7106
0x7107
0x7108
0x7109
0x710A
0x710B
0x710C
0x7110
0x7112
0x7114
0x7115
0x7118
0x711A
0x711C
0x711E
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
No
Control 1 Register
ADCCTL2
Control 2 Register
ADCINTFLG
Interrupt Flag Register
ADCINTFLGCLR
ADCINTOVF
No
Interrupt Flag Clear Register
No
Interrupt Overflow Register
ADCINTOVFCLR
INTSEL1N2
No
Interrupt Overflow Clear Register
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Interrupt 1 and 2 Selection Register
Interrupt 3 and 4 Selection Register
Interrupt 5 and 6 Selection Register
Interrupt 7 and 8 Selection Register
Interrupt 9 Selection Register (reserved Interrupt 10 Selection)
SOC Priority Control Register
INTSEL3N4
INTSEL5N6
INTSEL7N8
INTSEL9N10
SOCPRICTL
ADCSAMPLEMODE
ADCINTSOCSEL1
ADCINTSOCSEL2
ADCSOCFLG1
ADCSOCFRC1
ADCSOCOVF1
ADCSOCOVFCLR1
Sampling Mode Register
Interrupt SOC Selection 1 Register (for 8 channels)
Interrupt SOC Selection 2 Register (for 8 channels)
SOC Flag 1 Register (for 16 channels)
SOC Force 1 Register (for 16 channels)
SOC Overflow 1 Register (for 16 channels)
SOC Overflow Clear 1 Register (for 16 channels)
SOC0 Control Register to SOC15 Control Register
No
No
No
ADCSOC0CTL to
ADCSOC15CTL
0x7120 –
0x712F
Yes
ADCREFTRIM
ADCOFFTRIM
COMPHYSTCTL
ADCREV
0x7140
0x7141
0x714C
0x714F
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Reference Trim Register
Offset Trim Register
Comparator Hysteresis Control Register
Revision Register
Table 6-4. ADC Result Registers (Mapped to PF0)
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
ADCRESULT0 to
ADCRESULT15
0xB00 –
0xB0F
1
No
ADC Result 0 Register to ADC Result 15 Register
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
73
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
0-Wait
Result
Registers
PF0 (CPU)
PF2 (CPU)
SYSCLKOUT
ADCENCLK
ADCINT 1
ADCINT 9
PIE
TINT 0
TINT 1
TINT 2
CPUTIMER 0
CPUTIMER 1
CPUTIMER 2
ADCTRIG 1
ADCTRIG 2
ADCTRIG 3
ADC
Core
12-Bit
ADC
Channels
XINT 2SOC
XINT 2
EPWM 1
EPWM 2
EPWM 3
EPWM 4
EPWM 5
EPWM 6
EPWM 7
ADCTRIG 4
SOCA 1
SOCB 1
SOCA 2
SOCB 2
SOCA 3
SOCB 3
SOCA 4
SOCB 4
SOCA 5
SOCB 5
SOCA 6
SOCB 6
SOCA 7
SOCB 7
ADCTRIG 5
ADCTRIG 6
ADCTRIG 7
ADCTRIG 8
ADCTRIG 9
ADCTRIG 10
ADCTRIG 11
ADCTRIG 12
ADCTRIG 13
ADCTRIG 14
ADCTRIG 15
ADCTRIG 16
ADCTRIG 17
ADCTRIG 18
Figure 6-3. ADC Connections
ADC Connections if the ADC is Not Used
TI recommends that the connections for the analog power pins be kept, even if the ADC is not used.
Following is a summary of how the ADC pins should be connected, if the ADC is not used in an
application:
•
•
•
•
VDDA – Connect to VDDIO
VSSA – Connect to VSS
VREFLO – Connect to VSS
ADCINAn, ADCINBn, VREFHI – Connect to VSSA
When the ADC module is used in an application, unused ADC input pins should be connected to analog
ground (VSSA).
When the ADC is not used, be sure that the clock to the ADC module is not turned on to realize power
savings.
74
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.3.1.2 Analog-to-Digital Converter Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-5. ADC Electrical Characteristics
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
DC SPECIFICATIONS
Resolution
12
0.5
10
Bits
ADC clock
60
63
MHz
Sample Window (see Table 6-6)
28055, 28054, 28053,
28052
ADC
Clocks
28051, 28050
24
63
ACCURACY
INL (Integral nonlinearity)(1)
–4
–1
4
1.5
20
LSB
LSB
LSB
DNL (Differential nonlinearity), no missing codes
(2)
Offset error
Executing a single self-
recalibration(3)
–20
0
0
Executing periodic self-
recalibration(4)
–4
4
Overall gain error with internal reference
Overall gain error with external reference
Channel-to-channel offset variation
Channel-to-channel gain variation
ADC temperature coefficient with internal reference
ADC temperature coefficient with external reference
VREFLO
–60
–40
–4
60
40
4
LSB
LSB
LSB
–4
4
LSB
–50
–20
ppm/°C
ppm/°C
µA
–100
100
VREFHI
µA
ANALOG INPUT
Analog input voltage with internal reference
Analog input voltage with external reference
VREFLO input voltage
0
VREFLO
VSSA
3.3
VREFHI
0.66
V
V
V
V
VREFHI input voltage(5)
2.64
VDDA
VDDA
with VREFLO = VSSA
1.98
Input capacitance
5
pF
Input leakage current
±2
μA
(1) INL will degrade when the ADC input voltage goes above VDDA
.
(2) 1 LSB has the weighted value of full-scale range (FSR)/4096. FSR is 3.3 V with internal reference and VREFHI - VREFLO for external
reference.
(3) For more details, see the TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053, TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
Piccolo MCU Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ362).
(4) Periodic self-recalibration will remove system-level and temperature dependencies on the ADC zero offset error. This can be performed
as needed in the application without sacrificing an ADC channel by using the procedure listed in the "ADC Zero Offset Calibration"
section in the Analog-to-Digital Converter and Comparator chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical Reference Manual (literature
number SPRUHE5).
(5) VREFHI must not exceed VDDA when using either internal or external reference modes.
Table 6-6. ACQPS Values(1)
OVERLAP MODE
{9, 10, 23, 36, 49, 62}
{23, 36, 49, 62}
NONOVERLAP MODE
{15, 16, 28, 29, 41, 42, 54, 55}
{15, 16, 28, 29, 41, 42, 54, 55}
Non-PGA
PGA
(1) ACQPS = 6 can be used for the first sample if it is thrown away.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
75
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 6-7. ADC Power Modes
ADC OPERATING MODE
Mode A – Operating Mode
CONDITIONS
IDDA
UNITS
ADC Clock Enabled
13
mA
Bandgap On (ADCBGPWD = 1)
Reference On (ADCREFPWD = 1)
ADC Powered Up (ADCPWDN = 1)
Mode B – Quick Wake Mode
Mode C – Comparator-Only Mode
Mode D – Off Mode
ADC Clock Enabled
4
mA
mA
mA
Bandgap On (ADCBGPWD = 1)
Reference On (ADCREFPWD = 1)
ADC Powered Up (ADCPWDN = 0)
ADC Clock Enabled
1.5
Bandgap On (ADCBGPWD = 1)
Reference On (ADCREFPWD = 0)
ADC Powered Up (ADCPWDN = 0)
ADC Clock Enabled
0.075
Bandgap On (ADCBGPWD = 0)
Reference On (ADCREFPWD = 0)
ADC Powered Up (ADCPWDN = 0)
6.3.1.2.1 External ADC Start-of-Conversion Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-8. External ADC Start-of-Conversion Switching Characteristics
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tw(ADCSOCL)
Pulse duration, ADCSOCxO low
32tc(HCO )
cycles
tw(ADCSOCL)
ADCSOCAO
or
ADCSOCBO
Figure 6-4. ADCSOCAO or ADCSOCBO Timing
6.3.1.2.2 Internal Temperature Sensor
Table 6-9. Temperature Sensor Coefficient(1)
PARAMETER(2)
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
TSLOPE
Degrees C of temperature movement per measured ADC LSB change
of the temperature sensor
0.18(3)(4)
°C/LSB
TOFFSET
ADC output at 0°C of the temperature sensor
1750
LSB
(1) The accuracy of the temperature sensor for sensing absolute temperature (temperature in degrees) is not specified. The primary use of
the temperature sensor should be to compensate the internal oscillator for temperature drift (this operation is assured as per Table 5-5).
(2) The temperature sensor slope and offset are given in terms of ADC LSBs using the internal reference of the ADC. Values must be
adjusted accordingly in external reference mode to the external reference voltage.
(3) ADC temperature coeffieicient is accounted for in this specification
(4) Output of the temperature sensor (in terms of LSBs) is sign-consistent with the direction of the temperature movement. Increasing
temperatures will give increasing ADC values relative to an initial value; decreasing temperatures will give decreasing ADC values
relative to an initial value.
76
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.3.1.2.3 ADC Power-Up Control Bit Timing
Table 6-10. ADC Power-Up Delays
PARAMETER(1)
MIN
MAX
UNIT
td(PWD)
Delay time for the ADC to be stable after power up
1
ms
(1) Timings maintain compatibility to the ADC module. The 2805x ADC supports driving all 3 bits at the same time td(PWD) ms before first
conversion.
ADCPWDN/
ADCBGPWD/
ADCREFPWD/
ADCENABLE
td(PWD)
Request for ADC
Conversion
Figure 6-5. ADC Conversion Timing
Ron
3.4 kW
Switch
Rs
ADCIN
Cp
Ch
Source
Signal
ac
5 pF
1.6 pF
28x DSP
Typical Values of the Input Circuit Components:
Switch Resistance (Ron): 3.4 kW
Sampling Capacitor (Ch): 1.6 pF
Parasitic Capacitance (Cp): 5 pF
Source Resistance (Rs): 50 W
Figure 6-6. ADC Input Impedance Model
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
77
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.3.1.2.4 ADC Sequential and Simultaneous Timings
Analog Input
SOC0 Sample
Window
SOC1 Sample
Window
SOC2 Sample
Window
0
2
9
15
22 24
37
ADCCLK
ADCCTL 1.INTPULSEPOS
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC0
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC1
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC2
S/H Window Pulse to Core
ADCRESULT 0
SOC0
SOC1
SOC2
Result 0 Latched
2 ADCCLKs
ADCRESULT 1
EOC0 Pulse
EOC1 Pulse
ADCINTFLG.ADCINTx
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 0
13 ADC Clocks
1 ADCCLK
6
Minimum
ADCCLKs 7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 1
13 ADC Clocks
A. This diagram uses ACQPS = 6 timings. These particular timings are not valid on this device (except for a throw-away
sample to meet the first sample issue in the device errata), but they correctly demonstrate the operation of the
converter.
Figure 6-7. Timing Example for Sequential Mode / Late Interrupt Pulse
78
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Analog Input
SOC0 Sample
Window
SOC1 Sample
Window
SOC2 Sample
Window
0
2
9
15
22 24
37
ADCCLK
ADCCTL1.INTPULSEPOS
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC0
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC1
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC2
S/H Window Pulse to Core
ADCRESULT 0
SOC0
SOC1
SOC2
Result 0 Latched
ADCRESULT 1
EOC0 Pulse
EOC1 Pulse
EOC2 Pulse
ADCINTFLG.ADCINTx
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 0
13 ADC Clocks
2 ADCCLKs
6
Minimum
ADCCLKs 7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 1
13 ADC Clocks
A. This diagram uses ACQPS = 6 timings. These particular timings are not valid on this device (except for a throw-away
sample to meet the first sample issue in the device errata), but they correctly demonstrate the operation of the
converter.
Figure 6-8. Timing Example for Sequential Mode / Early Interrupt Pulse
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
79
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Analog Input A
SOC0 Sample
A Window
SOC2 Sample
A Window
Analog Input B
SOC0 Sample
B Window
SOC2 Sample
B Window
0
2
9
22 24
37
50
ADCCLK
ADCCTL1.INTPULSEPOS
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC0
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC1
ADCSOCFLG 1.SOC2
S/H Window Pulse to Core
ADCRESULT 0
SOC0 (A/B)
SOC2 (A/B)
2 ADCCLKs
Result 0 (A) Latched
ADCRESULT 1
Result 0 (B) Latched
ADCRESULT 2
EOC0 Pulse
EOC1 Pulse
1 ADCCLK
EOC2 Pulse
ADCINTFLG .ADCINTx
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 0 (A)
13 ADC Clocks
Conversion 0 (B)
13 ADC Clocks
2 ADCCLKs
19
ADCCLKs
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 1 (A)
13 ADC Clocks
A. This diagram uses ACQPS = 6 timings. These particular timings are not valid on this device (except for a throw-away
sample to meet the first sample issue in the device errata), but they correctly demonstrate the operation of the
converter.
Figure 6-9. Timing Example for Simultaneous Mode / Late Interrupt Pulse
80
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Analog Input A
Analog Input B
SOC0 Sample
A Window
SOC2 Sample
A Window
SOC0 Sample
B Window
SOC2 Sample
B Window
0
2
9
22 24
37
50
ADCCLK
ADCCTL1.INTPULSEPOS
ADCSOCFLG1.SOC0
ADCSOCFLG1.SOC1
ADCSOCFLG1.SOC2
S/H Window Pulse to Core
ADCRESULT 0
SOC0 (A/B)
SOC2 (A/B)
Result 0 (A) Latched
2 ADCCLKs
Result 0 (B) Latched
ADCRESULT 1
ADCRESULT 2
EOC0 Pulse
EOC1 Pulse
EOC2 Pulse
ADCINTFLG.ADCINTx
Conversion 0 (A)
13 ADC Clocks
Conversion 0 (B)
13 ADC Clocks
Minimum
2 ADCCLKs
7 ADCCLKs
19
Minimum
7 ADCCLKs
Conversion 1 (A)
13 ADC Clocks
ADCCLKs
A. This diagram uses ACQPS = 6 timings. These particular timings are not valid on this device (except for a throw-away
sample to meet the first sample issue in the device errata), but they correctly demonstrate the operation of the
converter.
Figure 6-10. Timing Example for Simultaneous Mode / Early Interrupt Pulse
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
81
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.3.1.2.5 Detailed Descriptions
Integral Nonlinearity
Integral nonlinearity refers to the deviation of each individual code from a line drawn from zero through full
scale. The point used as zero occurs one-half LSB before the first code transition. The full-scale point is
defined as level one-half LSB beyond the last code transition. The deviation is measured from the center
of each particular code to the true straight line between these two points.
Differential Nonlinearity
An ideal ADC exhibits code transitions that are exactly 1 LSB apart. DNL is the deviation from this ideal
value. A differential nonlinearity error of less than ±1 LSB ensures no missing codes.
Zero Offset
Zero error is the difference between the ideal input voltage and the actual input voltage that just causes a
transition from an output code of zero to an output code of one.
Gain Error
The first code transition should occur at an analog value one-half LSB above negative full scale. The last
transition should occur at an analog value one and one-half LSB below the nominal full scale. Gain error is
the deviation of the actual difference between first and last code transitions and the ideal difference
between first and last code transitions.
Signal-to-Noise Ratio + Distortion (SINAD)
SINAD is the ratio of the rms value of the measured input signal to the rms sum of all other spectral
components below the Nyquist frequency, including harmonics but excluding dc. The value for SINAD is
expressed in decibels.
Effective Number of Bits (ENOB)
For a sine wave, SINAD can be expressed in terms of the number of bits. Using the following formula,
(SINAD -1.76)
N =
6.02
it is possible to get a measure of performance expressed as N, the effective number of
bits. Thus, effective number of bits for a device for sine wave inputs at a given input frequency can be
calculated directly from its measured SINAD.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
THD is the ratio of the rms sum of the first nine harmonic components to the rms value of the measured
input signal and is expressed as a percentage or in decibels.
Spurious Free Dynamic Range (SFDR)
SFDR is the difference in dB between the rms amplitude of the input signal and the peak spurious signal.
82
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.3.2 Analog Front End (AFE)
6.3.2.1 Analog Front End Device-Specific Information
The Analog Front End (AFE) contains up to seven comparators with up to three integrated Digital-to-
Analog Converters (DACs), one VREFOUT-buffered DAC, up to four Programmable Gain Amplifiers
(PGAs), and up to four digital filters. Figure 6-11 and Figure 6-12 show the AFE.
The comparator output signal filtering is achieved using the Digital Filter present on selective input line
and qualifies the output of the COMP/DAC subsystem (see Figure 6-13). The filtered or unfiltered output
of the COMP/DAC subsystem can be configured to be an input to the Digital Compare submodule of the
ePWM peripheral. Note: The Analog inputs are brought in through the AFE subsystem rather than through
an AIO Mux, which is not present.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
83
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
VREFHI
VREFHI
A0
VREFOUT/A0
_
_
VREFOUT
COMPB7
DFSS
Cmp1
+
Cmp1
+
Buffered
DAC Output
DAC6 6-bit
B7
B7
PGA
G~ = 3, 6, 11
DAC5 6-bit
PFCGND
B0
A2
A4
B2
B0
A2
A4
B2
DAC1 6-bit
COMPA1H
_
_
COMPA1L
DFSS
Cmp2
Cmp3
+
+
ADCIN-
SWITCH
A1
DFSS
PGA
G~ = 3, 6, 11
A1
A3
M1GND
_
_
COMPA3H
DFSS
COMPA3L
DFSS
Cmp4
Cmp5
+
+
A3
B1
PGA
G~ = 3, 6, 11
_
_
M1GND
M1GND
COMPB1H
DFSS
COMPB1L
DFSS
Cmp6
Cmp7
+
+
PGA
G~ = 3, 6, 11
B1
ADCIN-
SWITCH
ADC
DAC2 6-bit
Temp Sensor
A5
A5
ADCCTL1.TEMPCONV
ADCCTL1.REFLOCONV
VREFLO
VREFLO
B5
B5
A7
B3
A7
B3
GAIN AMP
G~ = 3
A6
A6
B4
B6
M2GND
M2GND
M2GND
GAIN AMP
G~ = 3
B4
GAIN AMP
G~ = 3
B6
Legend
Cmp - Comparator
DFSS - Comparator Trip/Digital Filter Subsystem Block
GAIN AMP - Fixed Gain Amplifier
PGA - Programmable Gain Amplifier
Figure 6-11. 28055, 28054, 28053, 28052, and 28051 Analog Front End (AFE)
84
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
VREFHI
VREFHI
A0
VREFOUT/A0
_
VREFOUT
Cmp1
+
Buffered
DAC Output
DAC6 6-bit
GAIN AMP
G~ = 3
B7
B7
PFCGND
B0
A2
A4
B2
B0
A2
A4
B2
DAC1 6-bit
COMPA1H
_
_
COMPA1L
DFSS
Cmp2
Cmp3
+
+
ADCIN-
SWITCH
A1
DFSS
PGA
G~ = 3, 6, 11
A1
A3
M1GND
_
_
COMPA3H
DFSS
COMPA3L
DFSS
Cmp4
Cmp5
+
+
A3
B1
PGA
G~ = 3, 6, 11
_
_
M1GND
M1GND
COMPB1H
DFSS
COMPB1L
DFSS
Cmp6
Cmp7
+
+
PGA
G~ = 3, 6, 11
B1
A5
ADCIN-
SWITCH
ADC
DAC2 6-bit
Temp Sensor
A5
ADCCTL1.TEMPCONV
ADCCTL1.REFLOCONV
VREFLO
VREFLO
B5
B5
A7
B3
A7
B3
GAIN AMP
G~ = 3
A6
A6
B4
B6
M2GND
M2GND
M2GND
GAIN AMP
G~ = 3
B4
GAIN AMP
G~ = 3
B6
Legend
Cmp - Comparator
DFSS - Comparator Trip/Digital Filter Subsystem Block
GAIN AMP - Fixed Gain Amplifier
PGA - Programmable Gain Amplifier
Figure 6-12. 28050 Analog Front End (AFE)
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
85
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
ePWM 1-7
DCAH
DCAL
COMPxINPEN
D
CTRIPxx0CTLREGISTER
CTRIPEN
C
T
R
I
P
S
E
L
ENABLES
COMPxxPOL
CTRIPFILCTRL
REGISTER
COMPxxH
1
0
0
1
Digital Filter
(to all ePWM modules)
DCBH
DCBL
COMPxxPOL
COMPxxL
CTRIPBYP
SYSCLK
0
CTRIPxxOUTEN
CTRIPOUTxxSTS
CTRIPOUTxxFLG
CTRIPOUTLATEN
1
0
CTRIPOUTBYP
1
0
1
GPIO
MUX
CTRIPOUTPOL
Figure 6-13. Comparator Trip/Digital Filter Subsystem
86
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.3.2.2 Analog Front End Register Descriptions
Table 6-11. DAC Control Registers
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
DAC1CTL
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
0x6400
0x6401
0x6402
0x6403
0x6404
0x6405
1
1
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DAC1 Control Register
DAC2 Control Register
DAC3 Control Register
DAC4 Control Register
DAC5 Control Register
VREFOUT DAC Control Register
DAC2CTL
DAC3CTL
DAC4CTL
DAC5CTL
VREFOUTCTL
Table 6-12. DAC, PGA, Comparator, and Filter Enable Registers
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
DACEN
0x6410
0x6411
0x6412
0x6413
0x6414
0x6415
0x6416
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DAC Enables Register
VREFOUTEN
PGAEN
VREFOUT Enable Register
Programmable Gain Amplifier Enable Register
Comparator Enable Register
COMPEN
AMPM1_GAIN
AMPM2_GAIN
AMP_PFC_GAIN
Motor Unit 1 PGA Gain Controls Register
Motor Unit 2 PGA Gain Controls Register
PFC PGA Gain Controls Register
Table 6-13. SWITCH Registers
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
ADCINSWITCH
Reserved
0x6421
1
7
Yes
Yes
ADC Input-Select Switch Control Register
Reserved
0x6422 –
0x6428
COMPHYSTCTL
0x6429
1
Yes
Comparator Hysteresis Control Register
Table 6-14. Digital Filter and Comparator Control Registers
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
CTRIPA1ICTL
CTRIPA1FILCTL
CTRIPA1FILCLKCTL
Reserved
0x6430
0x6431
0x6432
0x6433
0x6434
0x6435
0x6436
0x6437
0x6438
0x6439
0x643A
0x643B
0x643C
0x643D
0x643E
0x643F
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CTRIPA1 Filter Input and Function Control Register
CTRIPA1 Filter Parameters Register
CTRIPA1 Filter Sample Clock Control Register
Reserved
CTRIPA3ICTL
CTRIPA3FILCTL
CTRIPA3FILCLKCTL
Reserved
CTRIPA3 Filter Input and Function Control Register
CTRIPA3 Filter Parameters Register
CTRIPA3 Filter Sample Clock Control Register
Reserved
CTRIPB1ICTL
CTRIPB1FILCTL
CTRIPB1FILCLKCTL
Reserved
CTRIPB1 Filter Input and Function Control Register
CTRIPB1 Filter Parameters Register
CTRIPB1 Filter Sample Clock Control Register
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
CTRIPM1OCTL
CTRIPM1STS
CTRIPM1FLGCLR
CTRIPM1 CTRIP Filter Output Control Register
CTRIPM1 CTRIPxx Outputs Status Register
CTRIPM1 CTRIPxx Flag Clear Register
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
87
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 6-14. Digital Filter and Comparator Control Registers (continued)
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
Reserved
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
0x6440 –
0x644F
16
Yes
Reserved
CTRIPA6ICTL
CTRIPA6FILCTL
CTRIPA6FILCLKCTL
Reserved
0x6450
0x6451
0x6452
0x6453
0x6454
0x6455
0x6456
0x6457
0x6458
0x6459
0x645A
0x645B
0x645C
0x645D
0x645E
0x645F
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CTRIPA6 Filter Input and Function Control Register
CTRIPA6 Filter Parameters Register
CTRIPA6 Filter Sample Clock Control Register
Reserved
CTRIPB4ICTL
CTRIPB4FILCTL
CTRIPB4FILCLKCTL
Reserved
CTRIPB4 Filter Input and Function Control Register
CTRIPB4 Filter Parameters Register
CTRIPB4 Filter Sample Clock Control Register
Reserved
CTRIPB6ICTL
CTRIPB6FILCTL
CTRIPB6FILCLKCTL
Reserved
CTRIPB6 Filter Input and Function Control Register
CTRIPB6 Filter Parameters Register
CTRIPB6 Filter Sample Clock Control Register
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
CTRIPM2OCTL
CTRIPM2STS
CTRIPM2FLGCLR
Reserved
CTRIPM2 CTRIP Filter Output Control Register
CTRIPM2 CTRIPxx Outputs Status Register
CTRIPM2 CTRIPxx Flag Clear Register
Reserved
0x6460 –
0x646F
CTRIPB7ICTL
CTRIPB7FILCTL
CTRIPB7FILCLKCTL
Reserved
0x6470
0x6471
0x6472
1
1
1
9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CTRIPB7 Filter Input and Function Control Register
CTRIPB7 Filter Parameters Register
CTRIPB7 Filter Sample Clock Control Register
Reserved
0x6473 –
0x647B
Reserved
0x647C
0x647D
0x647E
0x647F
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reserved
CTRIPPFCOCTL
CTRIPPFCSTS
CTRIPPFCFLGCLR
CTRIPPFC CTRIPxx Outputs Status Register
CTRIPPFC CTRIPxx Flag Clear Register
CTRIPPFC COMP Test Control Register
Table 6-15. LOCK Registers
SIZE
(x16)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
REGISTER NAME
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
LOCKCTRIP
Reserved
0x64F0
0x64F1
0x64F2
0x64F3
0x64F4
0x64F5
0x64F6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lock Register for CTRIP Filters Register
Reserved
LOCKDAC
Lock Register for DACs Register
Reserved
Reserved
LOCKAMPCOMP
Reserved
Lock Register for Amplifiers and Comparators Register
Reserved
LOCKSWITCH
Lock Register for Switches Register
88
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.3.2.3 Programmable Gain Amplifier Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-16. Op-Amp Linear Output and ADC Sampling Time Across Gain Settings
MINIMUM
EQUIVALENT GAIN FROM
INPUT TO OUTPUT
LINEAR OUTPUT RANGE
OF OP-AMP
ADC SAMPLING TIME
TO ACHIEVE SETTLING
ACCURACY
INTERNAL RESISTOR RATIO
10
5
11
6
0.6 V to VDDA – 0.6 V
0.6 V to VDDA – 0.6 V
0.6 V to VDDA – 0.6 V
384 ns (ACQPS = 23)
384 ns (ACQPS = 23)
384 ns (ACQPS = 23)
2
3
Table 6-17. PGA Gain Stage: DC Accuracy Across Gain Settings
COMPENSATED
GAIN-ERROR DRIFT ACROSS
COMPENSATED INPUT
OFFSET-ERROR ACROSS
EQUIVALENT GAIN FROM
INPUT TO OUTPUT
INTERNAL RESISTOR RATIO
TEMPERATURE AND SUPPLY TEMPERATURE AND SUPPLY
VARIATIONS
VARIATIONS IN mV
10
5
11
6
< ±2.5%
< ±8 mV
< ±1.5%
< ±8 mV
2
3
< ±1.0%
< ±8 mV
6.3.2.4 Comparator Block Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-18. Electrical Characteristics of the Comparator/DAC
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
Comparator
Comparator Input Range
Comparator response time to PWM Trip Zone (Async)
VSSA – VDDA
V
65
95
ns
Comparator large step response time to PWM Trip Zone (Async)
ns
Input Offset
Input Hysteresis(1)
TBD
TBD
mV
mV
DAC
DAC Output Range
DAC resolution
DAC Gain
VDDA / 26 – VDDA
V
6
–1.5
10
bits
%
DAC Offset
Monotonic
mV
Yes
0.2
INL
LSB
(1) Hysteresis on the comparator inputs is achieved with a Schmidt trigger configuration, which results in an effective 100-kΩ feedback
resistance between the output of the comparator and the non-inverting input of the comparator. There is an option to disable the
hysteresis and, with it, the feedback resistance; see the Analog-to-Digital Converter and Comparator chapter of the TMS320x2805x
Piccolo Technical Reference Manual (literature number SPRUHE5) for more information on this option if needed in your system.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
89
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.3.2.5 VREFOUT Buffered DAC Electrical Data
Table 6-19. Electrical Characteristics of VREFOUT Buffered DAC
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNITS
LSB
bits
VREFOUT Programmable Range
VREFOUT resolution
VREFOUT Gain
VREFOUT Offset
Monotonic
6
56
6
–1.5
10
%
mV
Yes
±0.2
INL
LSB
kΩ
Load
3
100
pF
90
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.4 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
6.4.1 Serial Peripheral Interface Device-Specific Information
The device includes the four-pin serial peripheral interface (SPI) module. The SPI is a high-speed,
synchronous serial I/O port that allows a serial bit stream of programmed length (one to sixteen bits) to be
shifted into and out of the device at a programmable bit-transfer rate. Normally, the SPI is used for
communications between the MCU and external peripherals or another processor. Typical applications
include external I/O or peripheral expansion through devices such as shift registers, display drivers, and
ADCs. Multidevice communications are supported by the master/slave operation of the SPI.
The SPI module features include:
•
Four external pins:
–
–
–
–
SPISOMI: SPI slave-output/master-input pin
SPISIMO: SPI slave-input/master-output pin
SPISTE: SPI slave transmit-enable pin
SPICLK: SPI serial-clock pin
NOTE: All four pins can be used as GPIO if the SPI module is not used.
•
Two operational modes: master and slave
Baud rate: 125 different programmable rates.
LSPCLK
Baud rate =
when SPIBRR = 3 to127
when SPIBRR = 0,1, 2
(SPIBRR + 1)
LSPCLK
Baud rate =
4
•
•
Data word length: one to sixteen data bits
Four clocking schemes (controlled by clock polarity and clock phase bits) include:
–
–
–
–
Falling edge without phase delay: SPICLK active-high. SPI transmits data on the falling edge of the
SPICLK signal and receives data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal.
Falling edge with phase delay: SPICLK active-high. SPI transmits data one half-cycle ahead of the
falling edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal.
Rising edge without phase delay: SPICLK inactive-low. SPI transmits data on the rising edge of the
SPICLK signal and receives data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal.
Rising edge with phase delay: SPICLK inactive-low. SPI transmits data one half-cycle ahead of the
falling edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal.
•
•
Simultaneous receive and transmit operation (transmit function can be disabled in software)
Transmitter and receiver operations are accomplished through either interrupt-driven or polled
algorithms.
•
Nine SPI module control registers: Located in control register frame beginning at address 7040h.
NOTE
All registers in this module are 16-bit registers that are connected to Peripheral Frame 2.
When a register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte (7–0), and the upper byte
(15–8) is read as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect.
Enhanced feature:
•
•
•
•
4-level transmit/receive FIFO
Delayed transmit control
Bi-directional 3-wire SPI mode support
Audio data receive support via SPISTE inversion
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
91
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Figure 6-14 is a block diagram of the SPI in slave mode.
SPIFFENA
Overrun
INT ENA
Receiver
Overrun Flag
SPIFFTX.14
RX FIFO Registers
SPIRXBUF
SPISTS.7
SPICTL.4
RX FIFO _0
RX FIFO _1
-----
SPIINT
RX FIFO Interrupt
RX Interrupt
Logic
RX FIFO _3
16
SPIRXBUF
Buffer Register
SPIFFOVF
FLAG
SPIFFRX.15
To CPU
TX FIFO Registers
SPITXBUF
TX FIFO _3
TX Interrupt
Logic
TX FIFO Interrupt
-----
TX FIFO _1
SPITX
TX FIFO _0
16
SPI INT
ENA
16
SPI INT FLAG
SPITXBUF
Buffer Register
SPISTS.6
SPICTL.0
TRIWIRE
SPIPRI.0
16
M
S
M
SPIDAT
Data Register
TW
S
SW1
SW2
SPISIMO
SPISOMI
M
S
TW
SPIDAT.15 - 0
M
S
TW
STEINV
SPIPRI.1
Talk
STEINV
SPICTL.1
SPISTE
State Control
Master/Slave
SPICTL.2
SPI Char
LSPCLK
SPICCR.3 - 0
S
SW3
3
2
1
0
Clock
Polarity
Clock
Phase
M
S
SPI Bit Rate
SPIBRR.6 - 0
SPICCR.6
SPICTL.3
SPICLK
M
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
A. SPISTE is driven low by the master for a slave device.
Figure 6-14. SPI Module Block Diagram (Slave Mode)
92
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.4.2 Serial Peripheral Interface Register Descriptions
The SPI port operation is configured and controlled by the registers listed in Table 6-20.
Table 6-20. SPI-A Registers
NAME
SPICCR
SPICTL
ADDRESS
0x7040
0x7041
0x7042
0x7044
0x7046
0x7047
0x7048
0x7049
0x704A
0x704B
0x704C
0x704F
SIZE (x16) EALLOW PROTECTED
DESCRIPTION(1)
SPI-A Configuration Control Register
SPI-A Operation Control Register
SPI-A Status Register
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
SPISTS
SPIBRR
SPIRXEMU
SPIRXBUF
SPITXBUF
SPIDAT
SPI-A Baud Rate Register
SPI-A Receive Emulation Buffer Register
SPI-A Serial Input Buffer Register
SPI-A Serial Output Buffer Register
SPI-A Serial Data Register
SPIFFTX
SPIFFRX
SPIFFCT
SPIPRI
SPI-A FIFO Transmit Register
SPI-A FIFO Receive Register
SPI-A FIFO Control Register
SPI-A Priority Control Register
(1) Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce undefined
results.
6.4.3 Serial Peripheral Interface Master Mode Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-21 lists the master mode timing (clock phase = 0) and Table 6-22 lists the timing (clock
phase = 1). Figure 6-15 and Figure 6-16 show the timing waveforms.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
93
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 6-21. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)
SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS EVEN OR
SPIBRR = 0 OR 2
SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS ODD
AND SPIBRR > 3
NO.
UNIT
MIN
4tc(LCO)
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
2
tc(SPC)M
Cycle time, SPICLK
128tc(LCO)
0.5tc(SPC)M
5tc(LCO)
127tc(LCO)
ns
ns
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO)
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO)
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO)
10
tw(SPCL)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M
10
3
4
5
8
9
tw(SPCL)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 0)
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 1)
td(SPCH-SIMO)M
td(SPCL-SIMO)M
tv(SPCL-SIMO)M
tv(SPCH-SIMO)M
tsu(SOMI-SPCL)M
tsu(SOMI-SPCH)M
tv(SPCL-SOMI)M
tv(SPCH-SOMI)M
Delay time, SPICLK high to SPISIMO
valid (clock polarity = 0)
Delay time, SPICLK low to SPISIMO
valid (clock polarity = 1)
10
10
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
26
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
26
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK
low (clock polarity = 0)
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK
high (clock polarity = 1)
26
26
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.25tc(SPC)M – 10
0.25tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
(1) The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.
(2) tc(SPC) = SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR +1)
(3) tc(LCO) = LSPCLK cycle time
(4) Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:
Master mode transmit 15-MHz MAX, master mode receive 10-MHz MAX
Slave mode transmit 10-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 10-MHz MAX.
(5) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the clock polarity bit (SPICCR.6).
94
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
1
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 0)
2
3
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 1)
4
5
SPISIMO
Master Out Data Is Valid
8
9
Master In Data
Must Be Valid
SPISOMI
SPISTE(A)
A. In the master mode, SPISTE goes active 0.5tc(SPC) (minimum) before valid SPI clock edge. On the trailing end of the word, the SPISTE will go inactive 0.5tc(SPC) after
the receiving edge (SPICLK) of the last data bit, except that SPISTE stays active between back-to-back transmit words in both FIFO and non-FIFO modes.
Figure 6-15. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
95
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 6-22. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)
SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS EVEN
OR SPIBRR = 0 OR 2
SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS ODD
AND SPIBRR > 3
NO.
UNIT
MIN
4tc(LCO)
MAX
MIN
MAX
1
2
tc(SPC)M
Cycle time, SPICLK
128tc(LCO)
0.5tc(SPC)M
5tc(LCO)
127tc(LCO)
ns
ns
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc (LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc (LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO) – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 0.5tc(LCO
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO)
0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(LCO)
tw(SPCL))M
Pulse duration, SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M
0.5tc(SPC)M
3
6
tw(SPCL)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 0)
ns
ns
tw(SPCH)M
Pulse duration, SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 1)
tsu(SIMO-SPCH)M
Setup time, SPISIMO data valid
before SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
tsu(SIMO-SPCL)M
Setup time, SPISIMO data valid
before SPICLK low
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
(clock polarity = 1)
7
tv(SPCH-SIMO)M
tv(SPCL-SIMO)M
tsu(SOMI-SPCH)M
tsu(SOMI-SPCL)M
tv(SPCH-SOMI)M
tv(SPCL-SOMI)M
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
26
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
26
ns
ns
ns
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
10
11
Setup time, SPISOMI before
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
Setup time, SPISOMI before
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
26
26
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after
SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
0.25tc(SPC)M – 10
0.25tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
0.5tc(SPC)M – 10
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after
SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
(1) The MASTER/SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is set.
(2) tc(SPC) = SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)
(3) Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:
Master mode transmit 15-MHz MAX, master mode receive 10-MHz MAX
Slave mode transmit 10-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 10-MHz MAX.
(4) tc(LCO) = LSPCLK cycle time
(5) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).
96
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
1
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 0)
2
3
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 1)
6
7
Master out data Is valid
10
SPISIMO
SPISOMI
Data Valid
11
Master in data
must be valid
(A)
SPISTE
A. In the master mode, SPISTE goes active 0.5tc(SPC) (minimum) before valid SPI clock edge. On the trailing end of the word, the SPISTE will go inactive 0.5tc(SPC) after
the receiving edge (SPICLK) of the last data bit, except that SPISTE stays active between back-to-back transmit words in both FIFO and non-FIFO modes.
Figure 6-16. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
97
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.4.4 Serial Peripheral Interface Slave Mode Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-23 lists the slave mode external timing (clock phase = 0) and Table 6-24 (clock phase = 1).
Figure 6-17 and Figure 6-18 show the timing waveforms.
Table 6-23. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)(1)(2)(3)(4)(5)
NO.
MIN
MAX UNIT
12 tc(SPC)S
13 tw(SPCH)S
tw(SPCL)S
Cycle time, SPICLK
4tc(LCO)
ns
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10 0.5tc(SPC)S
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10 0.5tc(SPC)S
14 tw(SPCL)S
tw(SPCH)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10 0.5tc(SPC)S
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10 0.5tc(SPC)S
15 td(SPCH-SOMI)S
td(SPCL-SOMI)S
16 tv(SPCL-SOMI)S
tv(SPCH-SOMI)S
19 tsu(SIMO-SPCL)S
tsu(SIMO-SPCH)S
20 tv(SPCL-SIMO)S
tv(SPCH-SIMO)S
Delay time, SPICLK high to SPISOMI valid (clock polarity = 0)
Delay time, SPICLK low to SPISOMI valid (clock polarity = 1)
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
21
21
0.75tc(SPC)S
0.75tc(SPC)S
26
26
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
(1) The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.
(2) tc(SPC) = SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)
(3) Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:
Master mode transmit 15-MHz MAX, master mode receive 10-MHz MAX
Slave mode transmit 10-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 10-MHz MAX.
(4) tc(LCO) = LSPCLK cycle time
(5) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).
12
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 0)
13
14
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 1)
15
16
SPISOMI data Is valid
19
SPISOMI
SPISIMO
20
SPISIMO data
must be valid
(A)
SPISTE
A. In the slave mode, the SPISTE signal should be asserted low at least 0.5tc(SPC) (minimum) before the valid SPI clock
edge and remain low for at least 0.5tc(SPC) after the receiving edge (SPICLK) of the last data bit.
Figure 6-17. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0)
98
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 6-24. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)(1)(2)(3)(4)
NO.
MIN
8tc(LCO)
MAX UNIT
12 tc(SPC)S
13 tw(SPCH)S
tw(SPCL)S
Cycle time, SPICLK
ns
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0)
Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1)
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
0.125tc(SPC)S
0.5tc(SPC)S
ns
ns
ns
ns
0.5tc(SPC) S
0.5tc(SPC) S
0.5tc(SPC)S
14 tw(SPCL)S
tw(SPCH)S
17 tsu(SOMI-SPCH)S
tsu(SOMI-SPCL)S
18 tv(SPCL-SOMI)S
0.125tc(SPC)S
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.75tc(SPC)S
tv(SPCH-SOMI)S
Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.75tc(SPC) S
21 tsu(SIMO-SPCH)S
tsu(SIMO-SPCL)S
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0)
Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1)
26
26
ns
ns
22 tv(SPCH-SIMO)S
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high
(clock polarity = 0)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
tv(SPCL-SIMO)S
Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low
(clock polarity = 1)
0.5tc(SPC)S – 10
(1) The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared.
(2) tc(SPC) = SPI clock cycle time = LSPCLK/4 or LSPCLK/(SPIBRR + 1)
(3) Internal clock prescalers must be adjusted such that the SPI clock speed is limited to the following SPI clock rate:
Master mode transmit 15-MHz MAX, master mode receive 10-MHz MAX
Slave mode transmit 10-MHz MAX, slave mode receive 10-MHz MAX.
(4) The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6).
12
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 0)
13
14
SPICLK
(clock polarity = 1)
17
18
SPISOMI data is valid
SPISOMI
SPISIMO
Data Valid
21
22
SPISIMO data
must be valid
(A)
SPISTE
A. In the slave mode, the SPISTE signal should be asserted low at least 0.5tc(SPC) before the valid SPI clock edge and
remain low for at least 0.5tc(SPC) after the receiving edge (SPICLK) of the last data bit.
Figure 6-18. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1)
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
99
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.5 Serial Communications Interface (SCI)
6.5.1 Serial Communications Interface Device-Specific Information
The 2805x devices include three serial communications interface (SCI) modules (SCI-A, SCI-B, SCI-C).
Each SCI module supports digital communications between the CPU and other asynchronous peripherals
that use the standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format. The SCI receiver and transmitter are double-
buffered, and each has its own separate enable and interrupt bits. Both can be operated independently or
simultaneously in the full-duplex mode. To ensure data integrity, the SCI checks received data for break
detection, parity, overrun, and framing errors. The bit rate is programmable to over 65000 different speeds
through a 16-bit baud-select register.
Features of each SCI module include:
•
Two external pins:
–
–
SCITXD: SCI transmit-output pin
SCIRXD: SCI receive-input pin
NOTE: Both pins can be used as GPIO if not used for SCI.
Baud rate programmable to 64K different rates:
–
LSPCLK
Baud rate =
Baud rate =
when BRR ¹ 0
when BRR = 0
(BRR + 1) * 8
LSPCLK
16
•
Data-word format
–
–
–
–
One start bit
Data-word length programmable from one to eight bits
Optional even/odd/no parity bit
One or two stop bits
•
•
•
•
•
Four error-detection flags: parity, overrun, framing, and break detection
Two wake-up multiprocessor modes: idle-line and address bit
Half- or full-duplex operation
Double-buffered receive and transmit functions
Transmitter and receiver operations can be accomplished through interrupt-driven or polled algorithms
with status flags.
–
Transmitter: TXRDY flag (transmitter-buffer register is ready to receive another character) and TX
EMPTY flag (transmitter-shift register is empty)
–
Receiver: RXRDY flag (receiver-buffer register is ready to receive another character), BRKDT flag
(break condition occurred), and RX ERROR flag (monitoring four interrupt conditions)
•
•
Separate enable bits for transmitter and receiver interrupts (except BRKDT)
NRZ (non-return-to-zero) format
NOTE
All registers in this module are 8-bit registers that are connected to Peripheral Frame 2.
When a register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte (7–0), and the upper byte
(15–8) is read as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect.
Enhanced features:
•
•
Auto baud-detect hardware logic
4-level transmit/receive FIFO
100
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Figure 6-19 shows the SCI module block diagram.
SCICTL1.1
SCITXD
Frame Format and Mode
SCITXD
TXSHF
Register
TXENA
Parity
Even/Odd Enable
TX EMPTY
SCICTL2.6
8
SCICCR.6 SCICCR.5
TXRDY
TX INT ENA
SCICTL2.0
Transmitter-Data
Buffer Register
SCICTL2.7
TXWAKE
SCICTL1.3
1
8
TX FIFO _0
TX FIFO
Interrupts
TXINT
TX Interrupt
Logic
TX FIFO _1
-----
To CPU
TX FIFO _3
SCI TX Interrupt select logic
SCITXBUF.7-0
WUT
TX FIFO registers
SCIFFENA
AutoBaud Detect logic
SCIFFTX.14
SCIHBAUD. 15 - 8
SCIRXD
RXSHF
Register
Baud Rate
MSbyte
Register
SCIRXD
RXWAKE
LSPCLK
SCIRXST.1
SCILBAUD. 7 - 0
RXENA
SCICTL1.0
8
Baud Rate
LSbyte
Register
SCICTL2.1
Receive Data
Buffer register
SCIRXBUF.7-0
RXRDY
RX/BK INT ENA
SCIRXST.6
8
RX FIFO _3
BRKDT
SCIRXST.5
-----
RX FIFO
Interrupts
RX FIFO_1
RX FIFO _0
RXINT
RX Interrupt
Logic
SCIRXBUF.7-0
RX FIFO registers
To CPU
RXFFOVF
SCIRXST.7 SCIRXST.4 - 2
SCIFFRX.15
RX Error
FE OE PE
RX Error
RX ERR INT ENA
SCICTL1.6
SCI RX Interrupt select logic
Figure 6-19. Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Module Block Diagram
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
101
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.5.2 Serial Communications Interface Register Descriptions
The SCI port operation is configured and controlled by the registers listed in Table 6-25.
Table 6-25. SCI-A Registers(1)
EALLOW
PROTECTED
NAME
ADDRESS
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION
SCICCRA
SCICTL1A
0x7050
0x7051
0x7052
0x7053
0x7054
0x7055
0x7056
0x7057
0x7059
0x705A
0x705B
0x705C
0x705F
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
SCI-A Communications Control Register
SCI-A Control Register 1
SCIHBAUDA
SCILBAUDA
SCICTL2A
SCI-A Baud Register, High Bits
SCI-A Baud Register, Low Bits
SCI-A Control Register 2
SCIRXSTA
SCIRXEMUA
SCIRXBUFA
SCITXBUFA
SCIFFTXA(2)
SCIFFRXA(2)
SCIFFCTA(2)
SCIPRIA
SCI-A Receive Status Register
SCI-A Receive Emulation Data Buffer Register
SCI-A Receive Data Buffer Register
SCI-A Transmit Data Buffer Register
SCI-A FIFO Transmit Register
SCI-A FIFO Receive Register
SCI-A FIFO Control Register
SCI-A Priority Control Register
(1) Registers in this table are mapped to Peripheral Frame 2 space. This space only allows 16-bit accesses. 32-bit accesses produce
undefined results.
(2) These registers are new registers for the FIFO mode.
102
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.6 Enhanced Controller Area Network (eCAN)
6.6.1 Enhanced Controller Area Network Device-Specific Information
The CAN module (eCAN-A) has the following features:
•
•
•
Fully compliant with CAN protocol, version 2.0B
Supports data rates up to 1 Mbps
Thirty-two mailboxes, each with the following properties:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Configurable as receive or transmit
Configurable with standard or extended identifier
Has a programmable receive mask
Supports data and remote frame
Composed of 0 to 8 bytes of data
Uses a 32-bit time stamp on receive and transmit message
Protects against reception of new message
Holds the dynamically programmable priority of transmit message
Employs a programmable interrupt scheme with two interrupt levels
Employs a programmable alarm on transmission or reception time-out
•
•
•
•
•
Low-power mode
Programmable wake-up on bus activity
Automatic reply to a remote request message
Automatic retransmission of a frame in case of loss of arbitration or error
32-bit local network time counter synchronized by a specific message (communication in conjunction
with mailbox 16)
•
Self-test mode
–
Operates in a loopback mode receiving its own message. A "dummy" acknowledge is provided,
thereby eliminating the need for another node to provide the acknowledge bit.
NOTE
For a SYSCLKOUT of 60 MHz, the smallest bit rate possible is 4.6875 kbps.
The F2805x CAN has passed the conformance test per ISO/DIS 16845. Contact TI for test report and
exceptions.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
103
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
eCAN0INT
eCAN1INT
Controls Address
Data
32
Enhanced CAN Controller
Message Controller
Mailbox RAM
(512 Bytes)
Memory Management
Unit
eCAN Memory
(512 Bytes)
Registers and
CPU Interface,
Receive Control Unit,
Timer Management Unit
32-Message Mailbox
of 4 x 32-Bit Words
Message Objects Control
32
32
32
eCAN Protocol Kernel
Receive Buffer
Transmit Buffer
Control Buffer
Status Buffer
SN65HVD23x
3.3-V CAN Transceiver
CAN Bus
Figure 6-20. eCAN Block Diagram and Interface Circuit
Table 6-26. 3.3-V eCAN Transceivers
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
LOW-POWER
MODE
SLOPE
CONTROL
PART NUMBER
VREF
OTHER
TA
SN65HVD230
SN65HVD230Q
SN65HVD231
SN65HVD231Q
SN65HVD232
SN65HVD232Q
SN65HVD233
SN65HVD234
SN65HVD235
ISO1050
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3.3 V
3–5.5 V
Standby
Standby
Sleep
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
None
Yes
Yes
–
–40°C to 85°C
–40°C to 125°C
–40°C to 85°C
–40°C to 125°C
–40°C to 85°C
–40°C to 125°C
–40°C to 125°C
–40°C to 125°C
–40°C to 125°C
–55°C to 105°C
–
Yes
–
Sleep
Yes
–
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
–
None
None
–
Standby
Standby and Sleep
Standby
None
Adjustable
Adjustable
Adjustable
None
Diagnostic Loopback
–
Autobaud Loopback
Built-in Isolation
Low Prop Delay
Thermal Shutdown
Failsafe Operation
Dominant Time-Out
104
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
eCAN-A Control and Status Registers
Mailbox Enable - CANME
Mailbox Direction - CANMD
Transmission Request Set - CANTRS
Transmission Request Reset - CANTRR
Transmission Acknowledge - CANTA
Abort Acknowledge - CANAA
eCAN-A Memory (512 Bytes)
Control and Status Registers
6000h
Received Message Pending - CANRMP
Received Message Lost - CANRML
Remote Frame Pending - CANRFP
Global Acceptance Mask - CANGAM
603Fh
6040h
Local Acceptance Masks (LAM)
(32 x 32-Bit RAM)
607Fh
6080h
Master Control - CANMC
Message Object Time Stamps (MOTS)
(32 x 32-Bit RAM)
Bit-Timing Configuration - CANBTC
60BFh
60C0h
Error and Status - CANES
Message Object Time-Out (MOTO)
(32 x 32-Bit RAM)
Transmit Error Counter - CANTEC
Receive Error Counter - CANREC
Global Interrupt Flag 0 - CANGIF0
Global Interrupt Mask - CANGIM
Global Interrupt Flag 1 - CANGIF1
Mailbox Interrupt Mask - CANMIM
Mailbox Interrupt Level - CANMIL
60FFh
eCAN-A Memory RAM (512 Bytes)
6100h-6107h
6108h-610Fh
6110h-6117h
6118h-611Fh
6120h-6127h
Mailbox 0
Mailbox 1
Mailbox 2
Mailbox 3
Mailbox 4
Overwrite Protection Control - CANOPC
TX I/O Control - CANTIOC
RX I/O Control - CANRIOC
Time Stamp Counter - CANTSC
Time-Out Control - CANTOC
Time-Out Status - CANTOS
61E0h-61E7h
61E8h-61EFh
61F0h-61F7h
61F8h-61FFh
Mailbox 28
Mailbox 29
Mailbox 30
Mailbox 31
Reserved
Message Mailbox (16 Bytes)
Message Identifier - MSGID
Message Control - MSGCTRL
Message Data Low - MDL
Message Data High - MDH
61E8h-61E9h
61EAh-61EBh
61ECh-61EDh
61EEh-61EFh
Figure 6-21. eCAN-A Memory Map
NOTE
If the eCAN module is not used in an application, the RAM available (LAM, MOTS, MOTO,
and mailbox RAM) can be used as general-purpose RAM. The CAN module clock should be
enabled if the eCAN RAM (LAM, MOTS, MOTO, and mailbox RAM) is used as general-
purpose RAM.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
105
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.6.2 Enhanced Controller Area Network Register Descriptions
The CAN registers listed in Table 6-27 are used by the CPU to configure and control the CAN controller
and the message objects. eCAN control registers only support 32-bit read/write operations. Mailbox RAM
can be accessed as 16 bits or 32 bits. 32-bit accesses are aligned to an even boundary.
Table 6-27. CAN Register Map(1)
eCAN-A
REGISTER NAME
SIZE (x32)
DESCRIPTION
ADDRESS
0x6000
0x6002
0x6004
0x6006
0x6008
0x600A
0x600C
0x600E
0x6010
0x6012
0x6014
0x6016
0x6018
0x601A
0x601C
0x601E
0x6020
0x6022
0x6024
0x6026
0x6028
0x602A
0x602C
0x602E
0x6030
0x6032
CANME
CANMD
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Mailbox enable
Mailbox direction
CANTRS
CANTRR
CANTA
Transmit request set
Transmit request reset
Transmission acknowledge
Abort acknowledge
Receive message pending
Receive message lost
Remote frame pending
Global acceptance mask
Master control
CANAA
CANRMP
CANRML
CANRFP
CANGAM
CANMC
CANBTC
CANES
Bit-timing configuration
Error and status
CANTEC
CANREC
CANGIF0
CANGIM
CANGIF1
CANMIM
CANMIL
CANOPC
CANTIOC
CANRIOC
CANTSC
CANTOC
CANTOS
Transmit error counter
Receive error counter
Global interrupt flag 0
Global interrupt mask
Global interrupt flag 1
Mailbox interrupt mask
Mailbox interrupt level
Overwrite protection control
TX I/O control
RX I/O control
Time stamp counter (Reserved in SCC mode)
Time-out control (Reserved in SCC mode)
Time-out status (Reserved in SCC mode)
(1) These registers are mapped to Peripheral Frame 1.
106
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.7 Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C)
6.7.1 Inter-Integrated Circuit Device-Specific Information
The device contains one I2C Serial Port. Figure 6-22 shows how the I2C peripheral module interfaces
within the device.
The I2C module has the following features:
•
Compliance with the Philips Semiconductors I2C-bus specification (version 2.1):
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Support for 1-bit to 8-bit format transfers
7-bit and 10-bit addressing modes
General call
START byte mode
Support for multiple master-transmitters and slave-receivers
Support for multiple slave-transmitters and master-receivers
Combined master transmit/receive and receive/transmit mode
Data transfer rate of from 10 kbps up to 400 kbps (I2C Fast-mode rate)
•
•
One 4-word receive FIFO and one 4-word transmit FIFO
One interrupt that can be used by the CPU. This interrupt can be generated as a result of one of the
following conditions:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Transmit-data ready
Receive-data ready
Register-access ready
No-acknowledgment received
Arbitration lost
Stop condition detected
Addressed as slave
•
•
•
An additional interrupt that can be used by the CPU when in FIFO mode
Module enable/disable capability
Free data format mode
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
107
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
I2C Module
I2CXSR
I2CDXR
TX FIFO
RX FIFO
FIFO Interrupt to
CPU/PIE
SDA
Peripheral Bus
I2CRSR
I2CDRR
Control/Status
Registers
CPU
Clock
Synchronizer
SCL
Prescaler
Noise Filters
Arbitrator
Interrupt to
CPU/PIE
I2C INT
A. The I2C registers are accessed at the SYSCLKOUT rate. The internal timing and signal waveforms of the I2C port are
also at the SYSCLKOUT rate.
B. The clock enable bit (I2CAENCLK) in the PCLKCRO register turns off the clock to the I2C port for low power
operation. Upon reset, I2CAENCLK is clear, which indicates the peripheral internal clocks are off.
Figure 6-22. I2C Peripheral Module Interfaces
6.7.2 Inter-Integrated Circuit Register Descriptions
The registers in Table 6-28 configure and control the I2C port operation.
Table 6-28. I2C-A Registers
EALLOW
PROTECTED
NAME
ADDRESS
DESCRIPTION
I2C own address register
I2COAR
I2CIER
0x7900
0x7901
0x7902
0x7903
0x7904
0x7905
0x7906
0x7907
0x7908
0x7909
0x790A
0x790C
0x7920
0x7921
–
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
I2C interrupt enable register
I2C status register
I2CSTR
I2CCLKL
I2CCLKH
I2CCNT
I2CDRR
I2CSAR
I2CDXR
I2CMDR
I2CISRC
I2CPSC
I2CFFTX
I2CFFRX
I2CRSR
I2CXSR
I2C clock low-time divider register
I2C clock high-time divider register
I2C data count register
I2C data receive register
I2C slave address register
I2C data transmit register
I2C mode register
I2C interrupt source register
I2C prescaler register
I2C FIFO transmit register
I2C FIFO receive register
I2C receive shift register (not accessible to the CPU)
I2C transmit shift register (not accessible to the CPU)
–
108
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.7.3 Inter-Integrated Circuit Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-29. I2C Timing
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
MAX
UNIT
fSCL
SCL clock frequency
I2C clock module frequency is between
7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and
clock divider registers are configured
appropriately
400
kHz
vil
Low level input voltage
High level input voltage
Input hysteresis
0.3 VDDIO
V
V
Vih
0.7 VDDIO
Vhys
Vol
0.05 VDDIO
V
Low level output voltage
Low period of SCL clock
3 mA sink current
0
0.4
V
tLOW
I2C clock module frequency is between
7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and
clock divider registers are configured
appropriately
1.3
μs
tHIGH
High period of SCL clock
I2C clock module frequency is between
7 MHz and 12 MHz and I2C prescaler and
clock divider registers are configured
appropriately
0.6
μs
lI
Input current with an input voltage
–10
10
μA
between 0.1 VDDIO and 0.9 VDDIO MAX
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
109
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.8 Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM)
6.8.1 Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator Device-Specific Information
The devices contain up to seven enhanced PWM Modules (ePWM1–ePWM7). Figure 6-23 shows a block
diagram of multiple ePWM modules. Figure 6-24 shows the signal interconnections with the ePWM. See
the Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator (ePWM) Module chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical
Reference Manual (literature number SPRUHE5) for more details.
110
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
EPWMSYNCI
EPWM1SYNCI
EPWM1B
EPWM1TZINT
EPWM1INT
EPWM1
Module
TZ1 to TZ3
EPWM2TZINT
EPWM2INT
EQEP1ERR
CLOCKFAIL
EMUSTOP
TZ4
TZ5
TZ6
PIE
EPWMxTZINT
EPWMxINT
EPWM1ENCLK
TBCLKSYNC
eCAPI
EPWM1SYNCO
EPWM2SYNCI
EPWM1SYNCO
TZ1 to TZ3
EPWM2B
EPWM2
Module
CTRIP
Output
Subsystem
CTRIPxx
EQEP1ERR
CLOCKFAIL
EMUSTOP
EPWM1A
EPWM2A
TZ4
TZ5
TZ6
EPWM2ENCLK
TBCLKSYNC
EPWMxA
G
P
I
EPWM2SYNCO
O
M
U
X
SOCA1
SOCB1
SOCA2
SOCB2
SOCAx
SOCBx
ADC
EPWMxB
EPWMxSYNCI
TZ1 to TZ3
EPWMx
Module
EQEP1ERR
CLOCKFAIL
EMUSTOP
EQEP1ERR
TZ4
TZ5
TZ6
eQEP1
EPWMxENCLK
TBCLKSYNC
System Control
C28x CPU
SOCA1
SOCA2
SPCAx
ADCSOCAO
ADCSOCBO
Pulse Stretch
(32 SYSCLKOUT Cycles, Active-Low Output)
SOCB1
SOCB2
SPCBx
Pulse Stretch
(32 SYSCLKOUT Cycles, Active-Low Output)
Figure 6-23. ePWM
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
111
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Time-Base (TB)
CTR=ZERO
Sync
In/Out
Select
Mux
TBPRD Shadow (24)
TBPRD Active (24)
EPWMxSYNCO
CTR=CMPB
Disabled
CTR=PRD
TBCTL[SYNCOSEL]
TBCTL[PHSEN]
EPWMxSYNCI
DCAEVT1.sync
DCBEVT1.sync
Counter
Up/Down
(16 Bit)
TBCTL[SWFSYNC]
(Software Forced
Sync)
CTR=ZERO
TCBNT
Active (16)
CTR_Dir
CTR=PRD
CTR=ZERO
EPWMxINT
CTR=PRD or ZERO
CTR=CMPA
Event
Trigger
and
Interrupt
(ET)
16
EPWMxSOCA
Phase
TBPHS Active (24)
Control
CTR=CMPB
CTR_Dir
(A)
DCAEVT1.soc
(A)
EPWMxSOCB
EPWMxSOCA
ADC
DCBEVT1.soc
EPWMxSOCB
Action
Qualifier
CTR=CMPA
(AQ)
16
CMPA Active (24)
CMPA Shadow (24)
EPWMA
EPWMxA
PWM
Chopper
(PC)
Trip
Zone
(TZ)
Dead
CTR=CMPB
Band
(DB)
16
EPWMB
EPWMxB
EPWMxTZINT
TZ1 to TZ3
CMPB Active (16)
CMPB Shadow (16)
EMUSTOP
CLOCKFAIL
CTR=ZERO
EQEP1ERR
DCAEVT1.inter
DCBEVT1.inter
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
DCAEVT1.force
DCAEVT2.force
DCBEVT1.force
DCBEVT2.force
DCAEVT2.inter
DCBEVT2.inter
A. These events are generated by the Type 1 ePWM digital compare (DC) submodule based on the levels of the
COMPxOUT and TZ signals.
Figure 6-24. ePWM Sub-Modules Showing Critical Internal Signal Interconnections
112
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.8.2 Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator Register Descriptions
Table 6-30 and Table 6-31 show the complete ePWM register set per module.
Table 6-30. ePWM1–ePWM4 Control and Status Registers
SIZE (x16) /
#SHADOW
NAME
ePWM1
ePWM2
ePWM3
ePWM4
DESCRIPTION
Time Base Control Register
TBCTL
TBSTS
0x6800
0x6801
0x6802
0x6803
0x6804
0x6805
0x6806
0x6807
0x6808
0x6809
0x680A
0x680B
0x680C
0x680D
0x680E
0x680F
0x6810
0x6811
0x6812
0x6813
0x6814
0x6815
0x6816
0x6817
0x6818
0x6819
0x681A
0x681B
0x681C
0x6840
0x6841
0x6842
0x6843
0x6844
0x6845
0x6846
0x6847
0x6848
0x6849
0x684A
0x684B
0x684C
0x684D
0x684E
0x684F
0x6850
0x6851
0x6852
0x6853
0x6854
0x6855
0x6856
0x6857
0x6858
0x6859
0x685A
0x685B
0x685C
0x6880
0x6881
0x6882
0x6883
0x6884
0x6885
0x6886
0x6887
0x6888
0x6889
0x688A
0x688B
0x688C
0x688D
0x688E
0x688F
0x6890
0x6891
0x6892
0x6893
0x6894
0x6895
0x6896
0x6897
0x6898
0x6899
0x689A
0x689B
0x689C
0x68C0
0x68C1
0x68C2
0x68C3
0x68C4
0x68C5
0x68C6
0x68C7
0x68C8
0x68C9
0x68CA
0x68CB
0x68CC
0x68CD
0x68CE
0x68CF
0x68D0
0x68D1
0x68D2
0x98D3
0x68D4
0x68D5
0x68D6
0x68D7
0x68D8
0x68D9
0x68DA
0x68DB
0x68DC
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 1
1 / 1
1 / 0
1 / 1
1 / 1
1 / 1
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 1
1 / 1
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
Time Base Status Register
Reserved
TBPHS
TBCTR
TBPRD
Reserved
CMPCTL
Reserved
CMPA
Reserved
Time Base Phase Register
Time Base Counter Register
Time Base Period Register Set
Reserved
Counter Compare Control Register
Reserved
Counter Compare A Register Set
Counter Compare B Register Set
Action Qualifier Control Register For Output A
Action Qualifier Control Register For Output B
Action Qualifier Software Force Register
Action Qualifier Continuous S/W Force Register Set
Dead-Band Generator Control Register
Dead-Band Generator Rising Edge Delay Count Register
Dead-Band Generator Falling Edge Delay Count Register
Trip Zone Select Register(1)
CMPB
AQCTLA
AQCTLB
AQSFRC
AQCSFRC
DBCTL
DBRED
DBFED
TZSEL
TZDCSEL
TZCTL
Trip Zone Digital Compare Register
Trip Zone Control Register(1)
Trip Zone Enable Interrupt Register(1)
TZEINT
TZFLG
(1)
Trip Zone Flag Register
TZCLR
Trip Zone Clear Register(1)
Trip Zone Force Register(1)
Event Trigger Selection Register
Event Trigger Prescale Register
Event Trigger Flag Register
Event Trigger Clear Register
TZFRC
ETSEL
ETPS
ETFLG
ETCLR
(1) Registers that are EALLOW protected.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
113
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 6-30. ePWM1–ePWM4 Control and Status Registers (continued)
SIZE (x16) /
#SHADOW
NAME
ePWM1
ePWM2
ePWM3
ePWM4
DESCRIPTION
ETFRC
PCCTL
0x681D
0x681E
0x6820
0x6821
0x6826
0x6828
0x682A
0x682B
0x682C
0x682D
0x6830
0x6831
0x6832
0x6833
0x6834
0x6835
0x6836
0x6837
0x6838
0x6839
0x685D
0x685E
0x6860
-
0x689D
0x689E
0x68A0
-
0x68DD
0x68DE
0x68E0
-
1 / 0
1 / 0
Event Trigger Force Register
PWM Chopper Control Register
Reserved
Reserved
1 / 0
Reserved
1 / 0
Reserved
Reserved
-
-
-
1 / 0
Reserved
Reserved
0x6868
0x686A
0x686B
0x686C
0x686D
0x6870
0x6871
0x6872
0x6873
0x6874
0x6875
0x6876
0x6877
0x6878
0x6879
0x68A8
0x68AA
0x68AB
0x68AC
0x68AD
0x68B0
0x68B1
0x68B2
0x68B3
0x68B4
0x68B5
0x68B6
0x68B7
0x68B8
0x68B9
0x68E8
0x68EA
0x68EB
0x68EC
0x68ED
0x68F0
0x68F1
0x68F2
0x68F3
0x68F4
0x68F5
0x68F6
0x68F7
0x68F8
0x68F9
1 / 0
Reserved
Reserved
1 / W(2)
1 / W(2)
1 / W(2)
1 / W(2)
1 / 0
Reserved
TBPRDM
Time Base Period Register Mirror
Reserved
Reserved
CMPAM
Compare A Register Mirror
Digital Compare Trip Select Register
Digital Compare A Control Register(1)
Digital Compare B Control Register(1)
Digital Compare Filter Control Register(1)
Digital Compare Capture Control Register(3)
Digital Compare Filter Offset Register
(1)
DCTRIPSEL
DCACTL
1 / 0
DCBCTL
1 / 0
DCFCTL
1 / 0
DCCAPCT
DCFOFFSET
DCFOFFSETCNT
DCFWINDOW
DCFWINDOWCNT
DCCAP
1 / 0
1 / 1
1 / 0
Digital Compare Filter Offset Counter Register
Digital Compare Filter Window Register
Digital Compare Filter Window Counter Register
Digital Compare Counter Capture Register
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 1
(2) W = Write to shadow register
(3) Registers that are EALLOW protected.
114
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 6-31. ePWM5–ePWM7 Control and Status Registers
SIZE (x16) /
#SHADOW
NAME
ePWM5
ePWM6
ePWM7
DESCRIPTION
Time Base Control Register
TBCTL
0x6900
0x6901
0x6902
0x6903
0x6904
0x6905
0x6906
0x6907
0x6908
0x6909
0x690A
0x690B
0x690C
0x690D
0x690E
0x690F
0x6910
0x6940
0x6941
0x6942
0x6943
0x6944
0x6945
0x6946
0x6947
0x6948
0x6949
0x694A
0x694B
0x694C
0x694D
0x694E
0x694F
0x6950
0x6980
0x6981
0x6982
0x6983
0x6984
0x6985
0x6986
0x6987
0x6988
0x6989
0x698A
0x698B
0x698C
0x698D
0x698E
0x698F
0x6990
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 1
1 / 1
1 / 0
1 / 1
1 / 1
1 / 1
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 1
1 / 1
1 / 0
TBSTS
Time Base Status Register
Reserved
TBPHS
Reserved
Time Base Phase Register
TBCTR
Time Base Counter Register
Time Base Period Register Set
Reserved
TBPRD
Reserved
CMPCTL
Reserved
CMPA
Counter Compare Control Register
Reserved
Counter Compare A Register Set
Counter Compare B Register Set
Action Qualifier Control Register For Output A
Action Qualifier Control Register For Output B
Action Qualifier Software Force Register
Action Qualifier Continuous S/W Force Register Set
Dead-Band Generator Control Register
CMPB
AQCTLA
AQCTLB
AQSFRC
AQCSFRC
DBCTL
DBRED
Dead-Band Generator Rising Edge Delay Count
Register
DBFED
0x6911
0x6951
0x6991
1 / 0
Dead-Band Generator Falling Edge Delay Count
Register
TZSEL
0x6912
0x6913
0x6914
0x6915
0x6916
0x6917
0x6918
0x6919
0x691A
0x691B
0x691C
0x691D
0x691E
0x6920
-
0x6952
0x6953
0x6954
0x6955
0x6956
0x6957
0x6958
0x6959
0x695A
0x695B
0x695C
0x695D
0x695E
0x6960
-
0x6992
0x6993
0x6994
0x6995
0x6996
0x6997
0x6998
0x6999
0x699A
0x699B
0x699C
0x699D
0x699E
0x69A0
-
1 / 0
1 / 0
Trip Zone Select Register(1)
TZDCSEL
TZCTL
Trip Zone Digital Compare Register
Trip Zone Control Register(1)
Trip Zone Enable Interrupt Register(1)
1 / 0
TZEINT
TZFLG
1 / 0
(1)
1 / 0
Trip Zone Flag Register
TZCLR
1 / 0
Trip Zone Clear Register(1)
Trip Zone Force Register(1)
Event Trigger Selection Register
Event Trigger Prescale Register
Event Trigger Flag Register
Event Trigger Clear Register
Event Trigger Force Register
PWM Chopper Control Register
Reserved
TZFRC
1 / 0
ETSEL
1 / 0
ETPS
1 / 0
ETFLG
1 / 0
ETCLR
1 / 0
ETFRC
1 / 0
PCCTL
1 / 0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
TBPRDM
Reserved
CMPAM
DCTRIPSEL
DCACTL
DCBCTL
DCFCTL
DCCAPCT
1 / 0
1 / 0
Reserved
-
-
-
1 / 0
Reserved
0x6928
0x692A
0x692B
0x692C
0x692D
0x6930
0x6931
0x6932
0x6933
0x6934
0x6968
0x696A
0x696B
0x696C
0x696D
0x6970
0x6971
0x6972
0x6973
0x6974
0x69A8
0x69AA
0x69AB
0x69AC
0x69AD
0x69B0
0x69B1
0x69B2
0x69B3
0x69B4
1 / 0
Reserved
1 / W(2)
1 / W(2)
1 / W(2)
1 / W(2)
1 / 0
Reserved
Time Base Period Register Mirror
Reserved
Compare A Register Mirror
(1)
Digital Compare Trip Select Register
1 / 0
Digital Compare A Control Register(1)
Digital Compare B Control Register(1)
Digital Compare Filter Control Register(1)
Digital Compare Capture Control Register(1)
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
(1) Registers that are EALLOW protected.
(2) W = Write to shadow register
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
115
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 6-31. ePWM5–ePWM7 Control and Status Registers (continued)
SIZE (x16) /
#SHADOW
NAME
ePWM5
ePWM6
ePWM7
DESCRIPTION
DCFOFFSET
DCFOFFSETCNT
DCFWINDOW
DCFWINDOWCNT
DCCAP
0x6935
0x6936
0x6937
0x6938
0x6939
0x6975
0x6976
0x6977
0x6978
0x6979
0x69B5
0x69B6
0x69B7
0x69B8
0x69B9
1 / 1
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 0
1 / 1
Digital Compare Filter Offset Register
Digital Compare Filter Offset Counter Register
Digital Compare Filter Window Register
Digital Compare Filter Window Counter Register
Digital Compare Counter Capture Register
6.8.3 Enhanced Pulse Width Modulator Electrical Data/Timing
PWM refers to PWM outputs on ePWM1–7. Table 6-32 shows the PWM timing requirements and Table 6-
33, switching characteristics.
Table 6-32. ePWM Timing Requirements(1)
MIN
2tc(SCO)
MAX
UNIT
cycles
cycles
cycles
tw(SYCIN)
Sync input pulse width
Asynchronous
Synchronous
2tc(SCO)
With input qualifier
1tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-45.
Table 6-33. ePWM Switching Characteristics
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
33.33
MAX
UNIT
ns
tw(PWM)
Pulse duration, PWMx output high/low
Sync output pulse width
tw(SYNCOUT)
td(PWM)tza
8tc(SCO)
cycles
ns
Delay time, trip input active to PWM forced high
Delay time, trip input active to PWM forced low
no pin load
25
20
td(TZ-PWM)HZ
Delay time, trip input active to PWM Hi-Z
ns
116
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.8.3.1 Trip-Zone Input Timing
Table 6-34. Trip-Zone Input Timing Requirements(1)
MIN
2tc(TBCLK)
MAX UNIT
cycles
tw(TZ)
Pulse duration, TZx input low
Asynchronous
Synchronous
2tc(TBCLK)
cycles
With input qualifier
2tc(TBCLK) + tw(IQSW)
cycles
(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-45.
SYSCLK
t
w(TZ)
TZ(A)
t
d(TZ-PWM)HZ
PWM(B)
A. TZ - TZ1, TZ2, TZ3, TZ4, TZ5, TZ6
B. PWM refers to all the PWM pins in the device. The state of the PWM pins after TZ is taken high depends on the PWM
recovery software.
Figure 6-25. PWM Hi-Z Characteristics
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
117
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.9 Enhanced Capture Module (eCAP)
6.9.1 Enhanced Capture Module Device-Specific Information
The device contains an enhanced capture module (eCAP1). Figure 6-26 shows a functional block diagram
of a module.
CTRPHS
(phase register−32 bit)
APWM mode
SYNCIn
CTR_OVF
OVF
CTR [0−31]
PRD [0−31]
CMP [0−31]
TSCTR
(counter−32 bit)
SYNCOut
PWM
compare
logic
Delta−mode
RST
32
CTR=PRD
CTR=CMP
CTR [0−31]
PRD [0−31]
32
eCAPx
32
LD1
CAP1
(APRD active)
Polarity
select
LD
APRD
shadow
32
CMP [0−31]
32
32
LD2
CAP2
(ACMP active)
Polarity
select
LD
Event
qualifier
Event
Pre-scale
32
ACMP
shadow
Polarity
select
32
32
LD3
LD4
CAP3
(APRD shadow)
LD
CAP4
(ACMP shadow)
Polarity
select
LD
4
Capture events
4
CEVT[1:4]
Interrupt
Trigger
and
Flag
control
Continuous /
Oneshot
Capture Control
to PIE
CTR_OVF
CTR=PRD
CTR=CMP
Figure 6-26. eCAP Functional Block Diagram
The eCAP module is clocked at the SYSCLKOUT rate.
The clock enable bits (ECAP1 ENCLK) in the PCLKCR1 register turn off the eCAP module individually (for
low power operation). Upon reset, ECAP1ENCLK is set to low, indicating that the peripheral clock is off.
118
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.9.2 Enhanced Capture Module Register Descriptions
Table 6-35 shows the eCAP Control and Status Registers.
Table 6-35. eCAP Control and Status Registers
NAME
TSCTR
CTRPHS
CAP1
eCAP1
0x6A00
SIZE (x16) EALLOW PROTECTED
DESCRIPTION
Time-Stamp Counter
2
2
2
2
2
2
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
0x6A02
Counter Phase Offset Value Register
Capture 1 Register
0x6A04
CAP2
0x6A06
Capture 2 Register
CAP3
0x6A08
Capture 3 Register
CAP4
0x6A0A
Capture 4 Register
Reserved
ECCTL1
ECCTL2
ECEINT
ECFLG
ECCLR
ECFRC
Reserved
0x6A0C – 0x6A12
0x6A14
Reserved
Capture Control Register 1
Capture Control Register 2
Capture Interrupt Enable Register
Capture Interrupt Flag Register
Capture Interrupt Clear Register
Capture Interrupt Force Register
Reserved
0x6A15
0x6A16
0x6A17
0x6A18
0x6A19
0x6A1A – 0x6A1F
6.9.3 Enhanced Capture Module Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-36 shows the eCAP timing requirement and Table 6-37 shows the eCAP switching characteristics.
Table 6-36. Enhanced Capture (eCAP) Timing Requirement(1)
MIN
2tc(SCO)
MAX UNIT
cycles
tw(CAP)
Capture input pulse width
Asynchronous
Synchronous
2tc(SCO)
cycles
With input qualifier
1tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
cycles
(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-45.
Table 6-37. eCAP Switching Characteristics
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
tw(APWM)
Pulse duration, APWMx output high/low
20
ns
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
119
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.10 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP)
6.10.1 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Device-Specific Information
The device contains one enhanced quadrature encoder pulse (eQEP) module.
Figure 6-27 shows the eQEP functional block diagram.
System Control
Registers
To CPU
EQEPxENCLK
SYSCLKOUT
QCPRD
QCAPCTL
16
QCTMR
16
16
Quadrature
Capture
Unit
QCTMRLAT
QCPRDLAT
(QCAP)
QUTMR
QUPRD
QWDTMR
QWDPRD
Registers
Used by
Multiple Units
32
16
QEPCTL
QEPSTS
QFLG
UTOUT
QWDOG
UTIME
QDECCTL
16
WDTOUT
EQEPxAIN
EQEPxBIN
EQEPxIIN
EQEPxA/XCLK
EQEPxB/XDIR
EQEPxI
QCLK
QDIR
QI
EQEPxINT
16
PIE
Position Counter/
Control Unit
(PCCU)
EQEPxIOUT
EQEPxIOE
EQEPxSIN
EQEPxSOUT
EQEPxSOE
Quadrature
Decoder
(QDU)
QS
GPIO
MUX
QPOSLAT
QPOSSLAT
QPOSILAT
PHE
PCSOUT
EQEPxS
32
32
16
QPOSCNT
QPOSINIT
QPOSMAX
QEINT
QFRC
QPOSCMP
QCLR
QPOSCTL
Enhanced QEP (eQEP) Peripheral
Figure 6-27. eQEP Functional Block Diagram
120
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.10.2 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Register Descriptions
Table 6-38 shows the eQEP Control and Status Registers.
Table 6-38. eQEP Control and Status Registers
eQEP1
eQEP1
ADDRESS
NAME
QPOSCNT
SIZE(x16)/
#SHADOW
REGISTER DESCRIPTION
0x6B00
0x6B02
0x6B04
0x6B06
0x6B08
0x6B0A
0x6B0C
0x6B0E
0x6B10
0x6B12
0x6B13
0x6B14
0x6B15
0x6B16
0x6B17
0x6B18
0x6B19
0x6B1A
0x6B1B
0x6B1C
0x6B1D
0x6B1E
0x6B1F
0x6B20
2/0
2/0
2/0
2/1
2/0
2/0
2/0
2/0
2/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
31/0
eQEP Position Counter
QPOSINIT
QPOSMAX
QPOSCMP
QPOSILAT
QPOSSLAT
QPOSLAT
QUTMR
eQEP Initialization Position Count
eQEP Maximum Position Count
eQEP Position-compare
eQEP Index Position Latch
eQEP Strobe Position Latch
eQEP Position Latch
eQEP Unit Timer
QUPRD
eQEP Unit Period Register
eQEP Watchdog Timer
QWDTMR
QWDPRD
QDECCTL
QEPCTL
QCAPCTL
QPOSCTL
QEINT
eQEP Watchdog Period Register
eQEP Decoder Control Register
eQEP Control Register
eQEP Capture Control Register
eQEP Position-compare Control Register
eQEP Interrupt Enable Register
eQEP Interrupt Flag Register
eQEP Interrupt Clear Register
eQEP Interrupt Force Register
eQEP Status Register
QFLG
QCLR
QFRC
QEPSTS
QCTMR
eQEP Capture Timer
QCPRD
eQEP Capture Period Register
eQEP Capture Timer Latch
eQEP Capture Period Latch
QCTMRLAT
QCPRDLAT
Reserved
0x6B21 –
0x6B3F
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
121
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.10.3 Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse Electrical Data/Timing
Table 6-39 shows the eQEP timing requirement and Table 6-40 shows the eQEP switching
characteristics.
Table 6-39. Enhanced Quadrature Encoder Pulse (eQEP) Timing Requirements(1)
TEST CONDITIONS
Synchronous
MIN
MAX
UNIT
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
tw(QEPP)
QEP input period
2tc(SCO)
With input qualifier
Synchronous
2[1tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)]
tw(INDEXH)
tw(INDEXL)
tw(STROBH)
tw(STROBL)
QEP Index Input High time
QEP Index Input Low time
QEP Strobe High time
QEP Strobe Input Low time
2tc(SCO)
2tc(SCO) +tw(IQSW)
2tc(SCO)
With input qualifier
Synchronous
With input qualifier
Synchronous
2tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
2tc(SCO)
2tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
2tc(SCO)
With input qualifier
Synchronous
With input qualifier
2tc(SCO) +tw(IQSW)
(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-45.
Table 6-40. eQEP Switching Characteristics
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
td(CNTR)xin
Delay time, external clock to counter increment
4tc(SCO)
6tc(SCO)
cycles
cycles
td(PCS-OUT)QEP
Delay time, QEP input edge to position compare sync output
122
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.11 JTAG Port
6.11.1 JTAG Port Device-Specific Information
On the 2805x device, the JTAG port is reduced to 5 pins (TRST, TCK, TDI, TMS, TDO). TCK, TDI, TMS
and TDO pins are also GPIO pins. The TRST signal selects either JTAG or GPIO operating mode for the
pins in Figure 6-28. During emulation/debug, the GPIO function of these pins are not available. If the
GPIO38/TCK/XCLKIN pin is used to provide an external clock, an alternate clock source should be used
to clock the device during emulation/debug since this pin will be needed for the TCK function.
NOTE
In 2805x devices, the JTAG pins may also be used as GPIO pins. Care should be taken in
the board design to ensure that the circuitry connected to these pins do not affect the
emulation capabilities of the JTAG pin function. Any circuitry connected to these pins should
not prevent the emulator from driving (or being driven by) the JTAG pins for successful
debug.
TRST = 0: JTAG Disabled (GPIO Mode)
TRST = 1: JTAG Mode
TRST
TRST
XCLKIN
GPIO38_in
TCK
TCK/GPIO38
GPIO38_out
C28x
Core
GPIO37_in
TDO
TDO/GPIO37
1
0
GPIO37_out
GPIO36_in
1
0
TMS
TMS/GPIO36
TDI/GPIO35
1
GPIO36_out
GPIO35_in
1
0
TDI
1
GPIO35_out
Figure 6-28. JTAG/GPIO Multiplexing
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
123
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.11.1.1 Emulator Connection Without Signal Buffering for the MCU
Figure 6-29 shows the connection between the MCU and JTAG header for a single-processor
configuration. If the distance between the JTAG header and the MCU is greater than 6 inches, the
emulation signals must be buffered. If the distance is less than 6 inches, buffering is typically not needed.
Figure 6-29 shows the simpler, no-buffering situation. For the pullup and pulldown resistor values, see
Section 3.2.
6 inches or less
VDDIO
VDDIO
13
14
2
5
EMU0
EMU1
TRST
TMS
PD
4
6
8
TRST
TMS
TDI
GND
1
GND
GND
GND
GND
3
TDI
7
10
12
TDO
TCK
TDO
11
9
TCK
TCK_RET
MCU
JTAG Header
A. See Figure 6-28 for JTAG/GPIO multiplexing.
Figure 6-29. Emulator Connection Without Signal Buffering for the MCU
NOTE
The 2805x devices do not have EMU0/EMU1 pins. For designs that have a JTAG Header
on-board, the EMU0/EMU1 pins on the header must be tied to VDDIO through a 4.7-kΩ
(typical) resistor.
124
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.12 General-Purpose Input/Output (GPIO)
6.12.1 General-Purpose Input/Output Device-Specific Information
The GPIO MUX can multiplex up to three independent peripheral signals on a single GPIO pin in addition
to providing individual pin bit-banging I/O capability.
Table 6-41. GPIOA MUX(1) (2)
DEFAULT AT RESET
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 1
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 2
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 3
PRIMARY I/O
FUNCTION
GPAMUX1 REGISTER
BITS
(GPAMUX1 BITS = 00) (GPAMUX1 BITS = 01)
(GPAMUX1 BITS = 10)
(GPAMUX1 BITS = 11)
1-0
GPIO0
GPIO1
GPIO2
GPIO3
GPIO4
GPIO5
GPIO6
GPIO7
GPIO8
GPIO9
GPIO10
GPIO11
GPIO12
GPIO13
GPIO14
GPIO15
EPWM1A (O)
EPWM1B (O)
EPWM2A (O)
EPWM2B (O)
EPWM3A (O)
EPWM3B (O)
EPWM4A (O)
EPWM4B (O)
EPWM5A (O)
EPWM5B (O)
EPWM6A (O)
EPWM6B (O)
TZ1 (I)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
COMP1OUT (O)
Reserved
3-2
5-4
Reserved
7-6
SPISOMIA (I/O)
Reserved
COMP2OUT (O)
Reserved
9-8
11-10
13-12
15-14
17-16
19-18
21-20
23-22
25-24
27-26
29-28
31-30
SPISIMOA (I/O)
EPWMSYNCI (I)
SCIRXDA (I)
Reserved
ECAP1 (I/O)
EPWMSYNCO (O)
Reserved
ADCSOCAO (O)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
ADCSOCBO (O)
Reserved
Reserved
SCITXDA (O)
Reserved
Reserved
TZ2 (I)
Reserved
TZ3 (I)
Reserved
Reserved
TZ1 (I)
Reserved
Reserved
GPAMUX2 REGISTER
BITS
(GPAMUX2 BITS = 00) (GPAMUX2 BITS = 01)
(GPAMUX2 BITS = 10)
(GPAMUX2 BITS = 11)
1-0
GPIO16
GPIO17
SPISIMOA (I/O)
SPISOMIA (I/O)
SPICLKA (I/O)
SPISTEA (I/O)
EQEP1A (I)
EQEP1B (I)
EQEP1S (I/O)
EQEP1I (I/O)
ECAP1 (I/O)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
SDAA (I/OD)
SCLA (I/OD)
Reserved
Reserved
TZ2 (I)
TZ3 (I)
3-2
5-4
GPIO18
XCLKOUT (O)
ECAP1 (I/O)
COMP1OUT (O)
COMP2OUT (O)
Reserved
7-6
GPIO19/XCLKIN
GPIO20
9-8
11-10
13-12
15-14
17-16
19-18
21-20
23-22
25-24
27-26
29-28
31-30
GPIO21
GPIO22
GPIO23
Reserved
GPIO24
Reserved
GPIO25
Reserved
GPIO26
Reserved
Reserved
GPIO27
Reserved
Reserved
GPIO28
SCIRXDA (I)
SCITXDA (O)
CANRXA (I)
CANTXA (O)
TZ2 (I)
GPIO29
TZ3 (I)
GPIO30
Reserved
GPIO31
Reserved
(1) The word reserved means that there is no peripheral assigned to this GPxMUX1/2 register setting. Should the Reserved GPxMUX1/2
register setting be selected, the state of the pin will be undefined and the pin may be driven. This selection is a reserved configuration
for future expansion.
(2) I = Input, O = Output, OD = Open Drain
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
125
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
Table 6-42. GPIOB MUX(1)
DEFAULT AT RESET
PRIMARY I/O FUNCTION
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 1
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 2
PERIPHERAL
SELECTION 3
GPBMUX1 REGISTER
BITS
(GPBMUX1 BITS = 00)
(GPBMUX1 BITS = 01)
(GPBMUX1 BITS = 10)
(GPBMUX1 BITS = 11)
1-0
GPIO32
GPIO33
SDAA (I/OD)
SCLA (I/OD)
COMP2OUT (O)
Reserved
EPWMSYNCI (I)
EPWMSYNCO (O)
Reserved
ADCSOCAO (O)
ADCSOCBO (O)
COMP3OUT (O)
Reserved
3-2
5-4
GPIO34
7-6
GPIO35 (TDI)
GPIO36 (TMS)
GPIO37 (TDO)
GPIO38/XCLKIN (TCK)
GPIO39
Reserved
9-8
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
11-10
13-12
15-14
17-16
19-18
21-20
23-22
25-24
27-26
29-28
31-30
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
GPIO40
EPWM7A (O)
EPWM7B (O)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
GPIO41
Reserved
Reserved
GPIO42
Reserved
COMP1OUT (O)
COMP2OUT (O)
Reserved
GPIO43
Reserved
Reserved
GPIO44
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(1) I = Input, O = Output, OD = Open Drain
The user can select the type of input qualification for each GPIO pin via the GPxQSEL1/2 registers from
four choices:
•
•
•
Synchronization to SYSCLKOUT Only (GPxQSEL1/2 = 0, 0): This mode is the default mode of all
GPIO pins at reset and this mode simply synchronizes the input signal to the system clock
(SYSCLKOUT).
Qualification Using Sampling Window (GPxQSEL1/2 = 0, 1 and 1, 0): In this mode the input signal,
after synchronization to the system clock (SYSCLKOUT), is qualified by a specified number of cycles
before the input is allowed to change.
The sampling period is specified by the QUALPRD bits in the GPxCTRL register and is configurable in
groups of 8 signals. The sampling period specifies a multiple of SYSCLKOUT cycles for sampling the
input signal. The sampling window is either 3-samples or 6-samples wide and the output is only
changed when ALL samples are the same (all 0s or all 1s) as shown in Figure 6-32 (for 6 sample
mode).
•
No Synchronization (GPxQSEL1/2 = 1,1): This mode is used for peripherals where synchronization is
not required (synchronization is performed within the peripheral).
Due to the multi-level multiplexing that is required on the device, there may be cases where a peripheral
input signal can be mapped to more then one GPIO pin. Also, when an input signal is not selected, the
input signal will default to either a 0 or 1 state, depending on the peripheral.
126
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
GPIOXINT1SEL
GPIOXINT2SEL
GPIOXINT3SEL
GPIOLMPSEL
LPMCR0
External Interrupt
PIE
MUX
Low Power
Modes Block
Asynchronous
path
GPxDAT (read)
GPxQSEL1/2
GPxCTRL
GPxPUD
N/C
00
01
Peripheral 1 Input
Input
Internal
Pullup
Qualification
Peripheral 2 Input
10
11
Peripheral 3 Input
GPxTOGGLE
Asynchronous path
GPIOx pin
GPxCLEAR
GPxSET
00
01
GPxDAT (latch)
Peripheral 1 Output
10
11
Peripheral 2 Output
Peripheral 3 Output
High Impedance
Output Control
GPxDIR (latch)
00
01
Peripheral 1 Output Enable
Peripheral 2 Output Enable
0 = Input, 1 = Output
XRS
10
11
Peripheral 3 Output Enable
= Default at Reset
GPxMUX1/2
A. x stands for the port, either A or B. For example, GPxDIR refers to either the GPADIR and GPBDIR register
depending on the particular GPIO pin selected.
B. GPxDAT latch/read are accessed at the same memory location.
C. This diagram is a generic GPIO MUX block diagram. Not all options may be applicable for all GPIO pins. See the
Systems Control and Interrupts chapter of the TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical Reference Manual (literature number
SPRUHE5) for pin-specific variations.
Figure 6-30. GPIO Multiplexing
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
127
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.12.2 General-Purpose Input/Output Register Descriptions
The device supports 42 GPIO pins. The GPIO control and data registers are mapped to Peripheral
Frame 1 to enable 32-bit operations on the registers (along with 16-bit operations). Table 6-43 shows the
GPIO register mapping.
Table 6-43. GPIO Registers
NAME
ADDRESS
GPIO CONTROL REGISTERS (EALLOW PROTECTED)
0x6F80 GPIO A Control Register (GPIO0 to 31)
SIZE (x16)
DESCRIPTION
GPACTRL
GPAQSEL1
GPAQSEL2
GPAMUX1
GPAMUX2
GPADIR
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0x6F82
0x6F84
0x6F86
0x6F88
0x6F8A
0x6F8C
0x6F90
0x6F92
0x6F96
0x6F9A
0x6F9C
0x6FB6
0x6FBA
GPIO A Qualifier Select 1 Register (GPIO0 to 15)
GPIO A Qualifier Select 2 Register (GPIO16 to 31)
GPIO A MUX 1 Register (GPIO0 to 15)
GPIO A MUX 2 Register (GPIO16 to 31)
GPIO A Direction Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIO A Pull Up Disable Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIO B Control Register (GPIO32 to 44)
GPIO B Qualifier Select 1 Register (GPIO32 to 44)
GPIO B MUX 1 Register (GPIO32 to 44)
GPIO B Direction Register (GPIO32 to 44)
GPIO B Pull Up Disable Register (GPIO32 to 44)
Reserved
GPAPUD
GPBCTRL
GPBQSEL1
GPBMUX1
GPBDIR
GPBPUD
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
GPIO DATA REGISTERS (NOT EALLOW PROTECTED)
GPADAT
GPASET
0x6FC0
0x6FC2
0x6FC4
0x6FC6
0x6FC8
0x6FCA
0x6FCC
0x6FCE
0x6FD8
0x6FDA
0x6FDC
0x6FDE
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
GPIO A Data Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIO A Data Set Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIO A Data Clear Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIO A Data Toggle Register (GPIO0 to 31)
GPIO B Data Register (GPIO32 to 44)
GPIO B Data Set Register (GPIO32 to 44)
GPIO B Data Clear Register (GPIO32 to 44)
GPIO B Data Toggle Register (GPIO32 to 44)
Reserved
GPACLEAR
GPATOGGLE
GPBDAT
GPBSET
GPBCLEAR
GPBTOGGLE
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
GPIO INTERRUPT AND LOW POWER MODES SELECT REGISTERS (EALLOW PROTECTED)
GPIOXINT1SEL
GPIOXINT2SEL
GPIOXINT3SEL
GPIOLPMSEL
0x6FE0
0x6FE1
0x6FE2
0x6FE8
1
1
1
2
XINT1 GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)
XINT2 GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)
XINT3 GPIO Input Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)
LPM GPIO Select Register (GPIO0 to 31)
NOTE
There is a two-SYSCLKOUT cycle delay from when the write to the GPxMUXn and
GPxQSELn registers occurs to when the action is valid.
128
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.12.3 General-Purpose Input/Output Electrical Data/Timing
6.12.3.1 GPIO - Output Timing
Table 6-44. General-Purpose Output Switching Characteristics
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
13(1)
13(1)
15
UNIT
ns
tr(GPO)
tf(GPO)
tfGPO
Rise time, GPIO switching low to high
Fall time, GPIO switching high to low
Toggling frequency
All GPIOs
All GPIOs
ns
MHz
(1) Rise time and fall time vary with electrical loading on I/O pins. Values given in Table 6-44 are applicable for a 40-pF load on I/O pins.
GPIO
t
r(GPO)
t
f(GPO)
Figure 6-31. General-Purpose Output Timing
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
129
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.12.3.2 GPIO - Input Timing
Table 6-45. General-Purpose Input Timing Requirements
MIN
1tc(SCO)
MAX
UNIT
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
QUALPRD = 0
tw(SP)
Sampling period
QUALPRD ≠ 0
2tc(SCO) * QUALPRD
tw(SP) * (n(1) – 1)
2tc(SCO)
tw(IQSW)
Input qualifier sampling window
Pulse duration, GPIO low/high
Synchronous mode
With input qualifier
(2)
tw(GPI)
tw(IQSW) + tw(SP) + 1tc(SCO)
(1) "n" represents the number of qualification samples as defined by GPxQSELn register.
(2) For tw(GPI), pulse width is measured from VIL to VIL for an active low signal and VIH to VIH for an active high signal.
(A)
GPIO Signal
GPxQSELn = 1,0 (6 samples)
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
tw(SP)
Sampling Period determined
by GPxCTRL[QUALPRD](B)
tw(IQSW)
[(SYSCLKOUT cycle * 2 * QUALPRD) * 5(C)
]
Sampling Window
SYSCLKOUT
QUALPRD = 1
(SYSCLKOUT/2)
(D)
Output From
Qualifier
A. This glitch will be ignored by the input qualifier. The QUALPRD bit field specifies the qualification sampling period.
The QUALPRD bit field value can vary from 00 to 0xFF. If QUALPRD = 00, then the sampling period is 1
SYSCLKOUT cycle. For any other value "n", the qualification sampling period in 2n SYSCLKOUT cycles (that is, at
every 2n SYSCLKOUT cycles, the GPIO pin will be sampled).
B. The qualification period selected via the GPxCTRL register applies to groups of 8 GPIO pins.
C. The qualification block can take either three or six samples. The GPxQSELn Register selects which sample mode is
used.
D. In the example shown, for the qualifier to detect the change, the input should be stable for 10 SYSCLKOUT cycles or
greater. In other words, the inputs should be stable for (5 x QUALPRD x 2) SYSCLKOUT cycles. This condition would
ensure 5 sampling periods for detection to occur. Since external signals are driven asynchronously, an 13-
SYSCLKOUT-wide pulse ensures reliable recognition.
Figure 6-32. Sampling Mode
130
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
6.12.3.3 Sampling Window Width for Input Signals
The following section summarizes the sampling window width for input signals for various input qualifier
configurations.
Sampling frequency denotes how often a signal is sampled with respect to SYSCLKOUT.
Sampling frequency = SYSCLKOUT/(2 * QUALPRD), if QUALPRD ≠ 0
Sampling frequency = SYSCLKOUT, if QUALPRD = 0
Sampling period = SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD, if QUALPRD ≠ 0
In the above equations, SYSCLKOUT cycle indicates the time period of SYSCLKOUT.
Sampling period = SYSCLKOUT cycle, if QUALPRD = 0
In a given sampling window, either 3 or 6 samples of the input signal are taken to determine the validity of
the signal. The number of samples is determined by the value written to GPxQSELn register.
Case 1:
Qualification using 3 samples
Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD) x 2, if QUALPRD ≠ 0
Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle) x 2, if QUALPRD = 0
Case 2:
Qualification using 6 samples
Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle x 2 x QUALPRD) x 5, if QUALPRD ≠ 0
Sampling window width = (SYSCLKOUT cycle) x 5, if QUALPRD = 0
SYSCLK
GPIOxn
t
w(GPI)
Figure 6-33. General-Purpose Input Timing
VDDIO
> 1 MS
2 pF
VSS
VSS
Figure 6-34. Input Resistance Model for a GPIO Pin With an Internal Pull-up
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
131
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
6.12.3.4 Low-Power Mode Wakeup Timing
Table 6-46 shows the timing requirements, Table 6-47 shows the switching characteristics, and Figure 6-
35 shows the timing diagram for IDLE mode.
Table 6-46. IDLE Mode Timing Requirements(1)
MIN
2tc(SCO)
MAX
UNIT
Without input qualifier
With input qualifier
tw(WAKE-INT)
Pulse duration, external wake-up signal
cycles
5tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-45.
Table 6-47. IDLE Mode Switching Characteristics(1)
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
MAX
UNIT
cycles
cycles
(2)
Delay time, external wake signal to program execution resume
Without input qualifier
With input qualifier
Without input qualifier
With input qualifier
Without input qualifier
With input qualifier
20tc(SCO)
•
•
•
Wake-up from Flash
Flash module in active state
–
20tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
1050tc(SCO)
td(WAKE-IDLE)
cycles
cycles
Wake-up from Flash
Flash module in sleep state
–
1050tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
20tc(SCO)
Wake-up from SARAM
20tc(SCO) + tw(IQSW)
(1) For an explanation of the input qualifier parameters, see Table 6-45.
(2) This delay time is the time taken to begin execution of the instruction that immediately follows the IDLE instruction. execution of an ISR
(triggered by the wake-up) signal involves additional latency.
t
d(WAKE−IDLE)
Address/Data
(internal)
XCLKOUT
t
w(WAKE−INT)
WAKE INT(A)(B)
A. WAKE INT can be any enabled interrupt, WDINT or XRS. After the IDLE instruction is executed, a delay of 5
OSCCLK cycles (minimum) is needed before the wake-up signal could be asserted.
B. From the time the IDLE instruction is executed to place the device into low-power mode (LPM), wakeup should not be
initiated until at least 4 OSCCLK cycles have elapsed.
Figure 6-35. IDLE Entry and Exit Timing
132
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
Table 6-48. STANDBY Mode Timing Requirements
MIN
3tc(OSCCLK)
MAX
UNIT
Without input qualification
With input qualification(1)
Pulse duration, external
wake-up signal
tw(WAKE-INT)
cycles
(2 + QUALSTDBY) * tc(OSCCLK)
(1) QUALSTDBY is a 6-bit field in the LPMCR0 register.
Table 6-49. STANDBY Mode Switching Characteristics
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Delay time, IDLE instruction
executed to XCLKOUT low
td(IDLE-XCOL)
32tc(SCO)
45tc(SCO)
cycles
Delay time, external wake signal to program execution
resume(1)
cycles
cycles
Without input qualifier
100tc(SCO)
•
Wake up from flash
–
Flash module in active state With input qualifier
100tc(SCO) + tw(WAKE-INT)
1125tc(SCO)
td(WAKE-STBY)
Without input qualifier
•
Wake up from flash
cycles
cycles
–
Flash module in sleep state With input qualifier
1125tc(SCO) + tw(WAKE-INT)
100tc(SCO)
Without input qualifier
•
Wake up from SARAM
With input qualifier
100tc(SCO) + tw(WAKE-INT)
(1) This delay time is the time taken to begin execution of the instruction that immediately follows the IDLE instruction. execution of an ISR
(triggered by the wake up signal) involves additional latency.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
133
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
(C)
(F)
(A)
(B)
(D)(E)
(G)
Normal Execution
Device
Status
STANDBY
STANDBY
Flushing Pipeline
Wake-up
Signal(H)
t
w(WAKE-INT)
t
d(WAKE-STBY)
X1/X2 or
XCLKIN
XCLKOUT
t
d(IDLE−XCOL)
A. IDLE instruction is executed to put the device into STANDBY mode.
B. The PLL block responds to the STANDBY signal. SYSCLKOUT is held for the number of cycles indicated below
before being turned off:
•
•
•
16 cycles, when DIVSEL = 00 or 01
32 cycles, when DIVSEL = 10
64 cycles, when DIVSEL = 11
This delay enables the CPU pipeline and any other pending operations to flush properly.
C. Clock to the peripherals are turned off. However, the PLL and watchdog are not shut down. The device is now in
STANDBY mode. After the IDLE instruction is executed, a delay of 5 OSCCLK cycles (minimum) is needed before the
wake-up signal could be asserted.
D. The external wake-up signal is driven active.
E. The wake-up signal fed to a GPIO pin to wake up the device must meet the minimum pulse width requirement.
Furthermore, this signal must be free of glitches. If a noisy signal is fed to a GPIO pin, the wake-up behavior of the
device will not be deterministic and the device may not exit low-power mode for subsequent wake-up pulses.
F. After a latency period, the STANDBY mode is exited.
G. Normal execution resumes. The device will respond to the interrupt (if enabled).
H. From the time the IDLE instruction is executed to place the device into low-power mode (LPM), wakeup should not be
initiated until at least 4 OSCCLK cycles have elapsed.
Figure 6-36. STANDBY Entry and Exit Timing Diagram
Table 6-50. HALT Mode Timing Requirements
MIN
toscst + 2tc(OSCCLK)
toscst + 8tc(OSCCLK)
MAX
UNIT
cycles
cycles
tw(WAKE-GPIO)
tw(WAKE-XRS)
Pulse duration, GPIO wake-up signal
Pulse duration, XRS wakeup signal
Table 6-51. HALT Mode Switching Characteristics
over recommended operating conditions (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
MAX
UNIT
cycles
ms
td(IDLE-XCOL)
tp
Delay time, IDLE instruction executed to XCLKOUT low
PLL lock-up time
32tc(SCO)
45tc(SCO)
1
Delay time, PLL lock to program execution resume
1125tc(SCO)
35tc(SCO)
cycles
cycles
•
•
Wake up from flash
Flash module in sleep state
td(WAKE-HALT)
–
Wake up from SARAM
134
Peripheral Information and Timings
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
(C)
(F)
(A)
(H)
(B)
(G)
(D)(E)
Device
Status
HALT
HALT
Flushing Pipeline
PLL Lock-up Time
Normal
Execution
Wake-up Latency
GPIOn(I)
t
)
d(WAKE−HALT
t
w(WAKE-GPIO)
tp
X1/X2 or
XCLKIN
Oscillator Start-up Time
XCLKOUT
t
d(IDLE−XCOL)
A. IDLE instruction is executed to put the device into HALT mode.
B. The PLL block responds to the HALT signal. SYSCLKOUT is held for the number of cycles indicated below before
oscillator is turned off and the CLKIN to the core is stopped:
•
•
•
16 cycles, when DIVSEL = 00 or 01
32 cycles, when DIVSEL = 10
64 cycles, when DIVSEL = 11
This delay enables the CPU pipeline and any other pending operations to flush properly.
C. Clocks to the peripherals are turned off and the PLL is shut down. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as
the clock source, the internal oscillator is shut down as well. The device is now in HALT mode and consumes
absolute minimum power. It is possible to keep the zero-pin internal oscillators (INTOSC1 and INTOSC2) and the
watchdog alive in HALT mode. Keeping INTOSC1, INTOSC2, and the watchdog alive in HALT mode is done by
writing to the appropriate bits in the CLKCTL register. After the IDLE instruction is executed, a delay of 5 OSCCLK
cycles (minimum) is needed before the wake-up signal could be asserted.
D. When the GPIOn pin (used to bring the device out of HALT) is driven low, the oscillator is turned on and the oscillator
wake-up sequence is initiated. The GPIO pin should be driven high only after the oscillator has stabilized, which
enables the provision of a clean clock signal during the PLL lock sequence. Since the falling edge of the GPIO pin
asynchronously begins the wakeup procedure, care should be taken to maintain a low noise environment prior to
entering and during HALT mode.
E. The wake-up signal fed to a GPIO pin to wake up the device must meet the minimum pulse width requirement.
Furthermore, this signal must be free of glitches. If a noisy signal is fed to a GPIO pin, the wake-up behavior of the
device will not be deterministic and the device may not exit low-power mode for subsequent wake-up pulses.
F. Once the oscillator has stabilized, the PLL lock sequence is initiated, which takes 1 ms.
G. When CLKIN to the core is enabled, the device will respond to the interrupt (if enabled), after a latency. The HALT
mode is now exited.
H. Normal operation resumes.
I.
From the time the IDLE instruction is executed to place the device into low-power mode (LPM), wakeup should not be
initiated until at least 4 OSCCLK cycles have elapsed.
Figure 6-37. HALT Wake-Up Using GPIOn
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Peripheral Information and Timings
135
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
7 Device and Documentation Support
7.1 Device Support
7.1.1 Development Support
Texas Instruments (TI) offers an extensive line of development tools for the C28x™ generation of MCUs,
including tools to evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm
implementations, and fully integrate and debug software and hardware modules.
The following products support development of 2805x-based applications:
Software Development Tools
•
Code Composer Studio™ Integrated Development Environment (IDE)
–
–
–
–
C/C++ Compiler
Code generation tools
Assembler/Linker
Cycle Accurate Simulator
•
•
Application algorithms
Sample applications code
Hardware Development Tools
•
•
•
•
•
Development and evaluation boards
JTAG-based emulators - XDS510™ class, XDS560™ emulator, XDS100
Flash programming tools
Power supply
Documentation and cables
For a complete listing of development-support tools for the processor platform, visit the Texas Instruments
website at www.ti.com. For information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office
or authorized distributor.
7.1.2 Device and Development Support Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
TMS320™ MCU devices and support tools. Each TMS320™ MCU commercial family member has one of
three prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS (for example, TMX320F28055). Texas Instruments recommends two of
three possible prefix designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent
evolutionary stages of product development from engineering prototypes (with TMX for devices and TMDX
for tools) through fully qualified production devices and tools (with TMS for devices and TMDS for tools).
Device development evolutionary flow:
TMX
TMP
TMS
Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical
specifications
Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not
completed quality and reliability verification
Fully qualified production device
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
TMDX Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal
qualification testing
TMDS Fully qualified development-support product
136
Device and Documentation Support
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following
disclaimer:
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."
TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production
system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are
to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the
package type (for example, PN) and temperature range (for example, T). Figure 7-1 provides a legend for
reading the complete device name for any family member.
For device part numbers and further ordering information, see the TI website (www.ti.com) or contact your
TI sales representative.
For additional description of the device nomenclature markings on the die, see the TMS320F28055,
TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053, TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050 Piccolo MCU
Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ362).
TMX
320
F
28055 PN
T
PREFIX
TEMPERATURE RANGE
experimental device
prototype device
qualified device
TMX =
TMP =
TMS =
=
=
T
S
−40°C to 105°C
−40°C to 125°C
PACKAGE TYPE
80-Pin PN Low-Profile Quad Flatpack (LQFP)
DEVICE FAMILY
320 = TMS320 MCU Family
DEVICE
TECHNOLOGY
28055
28054
28053
28052
28051
28050
F = Flash
Figure 7-1. Device Nomenclature
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Device and Documentation Support
137
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
www.ti.com
7.2 Documentation Support
Extensive documentation supports all of the TMS320™ MCU family generations of devices from product
announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available include: data
sheets and data manuals, with design specifications; and hardware and software applications.
The following documents can be downloaded from the TI website (www.ti.com):
Data Manual and Errata
SPRS797
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053, TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051,
TMS320F28050 Piccolo Microcontrollers Data Manual contains the pinout, signal
descriptions, as well as electrical and timing specifications for the 2805x devices.
SPRZ362
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053, TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051,
TMS320F28050 Piccolo MCU Silicon Errata describes known advisories on silicon and
provides workarounds.
Technical Reference Manual
SPRUHE5 TMS320x2805x Piccolo Technical Reference Manual details the integration, the
environment, the functional description, and the programming models for each peripheral
and subsystem in the 2805x microcontrollers.
CPU User's Guides
SPRU430
TMS320C28x CPU and Instruction Set Reference Guide describes the central processing
unit (CPU) and the assembly language instructions of the TMS320C28x fixed-point digital
signal processors (DSPs). This Reference Guide also describes emulation features available
on these DSPs.
Peripheral Guides
SPRU566 TMS320x28xx, 28xxx DSP Peripheral Reference Guide describes the peripheral reference
guides of the 28x digital signal processors (DSPs).
Tools Guides
SPRU513
TMS320C28x Assembly Language Tools v5.0.0 User's Guide describes the assembly
language tools (assembler and other tools used to develop assembly language code),
assembler directives, macros, common object file format, and symbolic debugging directives
for the TMS320C28x device.
SPRU514
SPRU608
TMS320C28x Optimizing C/C++ Compiler v5.0.0 User's Guide describes the
TMS320C28x™ C/C++ compiler. This compiler accepts ANSI standard C/C++ source code
and produces TMS320 DSP assembly language source code for the TMS320C28x device.
TMS320C28x Instruction Set Simulator Technical Overview describes the simulator,
available within the Code Composer Studio for TMS320C2000 IDE, that simulates the
instruction set of the C28x™ core.
7.3 Community Resources
The following links connect to TI community resources. Linked contents are provided "AS IS" by the
respective contributors. They do not constitute TI specifications and do not necessarily reflect TI's views;
see TI's Terms of Use.
TI E2E Community TI's Engineer-to-Engineer (E2E) Community. Created to foster collaboration
among engineers. At e2e.ti.com, you can ask questions, share knowledge, explore ideas and
help solve problems with fellow engineers.
TI Embedded Processors Wiki Texas Instruments Embedded Processors Wiki. Established to help
developers get started with Embedded Processors from Texas Instruments and to foster
innovation and growth of general knowledge about the hardware and software surrounding
these devices.
138
Device and Documentation Support
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
TMS320F28055, TMS320F28054, TMS320F28053
TMS320F28052, TMS320F28051, TMS320F28050
www.ti.com
SPRS797 –NOVEMBER 2012
8 Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
8.1 Thermal Data for Package
Table 8-1 shows the thermal data. See Section 2.9 for more information on thermal design considerations.
Table 8-1. Thermal Model 80-Pin PN Results
AIR FLOW
PARAMETER
0 lfm
49.9
0.8
150 lfm
38.3
250 lfm
36.7
500 lfm
34.4
θJA [°C/W] High k PCB
ΨJT [°C/W]
ΨJB
1.18
1.34
1.62
21.6
14.2
21.9
20.7
20.5
20.1
θJC
θJB
8.2 Packaging Information
The following packaging information and addendum reflect the most current data available for the
designated devices. This data is subject to change without notice and without revision of this document.
Copyright © 2012, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Mechanical Packaging and Orderable Information
Submit Documentation Feedback
139
Product Folder Links: TMS320F28055 TMS320F28054 TMS320F28053 TMS320F28052 TMS320F28051
TMS320F28050
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
28-Feb-2013
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device
Status Package Type Package Pins Package Qty
Eco Plan Lead/Ball Finish
MSL Peak Temp
Op Temp (°C)
Top-Side Markings
Samples
Drawing
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
PN
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
TMS320F28050PNQ
TMS320F28050PNS
TMS320F28050PNT
TMS320F28051PNQ
TMS320F28051PNS
TMS320F28051PNT
TMS320F28052PNQ
TMS320F28052PNS
TMS320F28052PNT
TMS320F28053PNQ
TMS320F28053PNS
TMS320F28053PNT
TMS320F28054PNQ
TMS320F28054PNS
TMS320F28054PNT
TMS320F28055PNQ
TMS320F28055PNS
TMS320F28055PNT
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
LQFP
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
119
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
CU NIPDAU
Call TI
Call TI
-40 to 125
-40 to 125
-40 to 105
-40 to 125
-40 to 125
-40 to 105
-40 to 125
-40 to 125
-40 to 105
-40 to 125
-40 to 105
-40 to 105
-40 to 125
-40 to 125
-40 to 105
-40 to 125
-40 to 125
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Call TI
Green (RoHS
& no Sb/Br)
Level-3-260C-168 HR
-40 to 105 F28055PNT
TMS320
TMX320F28055PNT
ACTIVE
LQFP
PN
80
1
TBD
Call TI
Call TI
-40 to 105
(1) The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Addendum-Page 1
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
28-Feb-2013
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3) MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
(4) Only one of markings shown within the brackets will appear on the physical device.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
Addendum-Page 2
MECHANICAL DATA
MTQF010A – JANUARY 1995 – REVISED DECEMBER 1996
PN (S-PQFP-G80)
PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK
0,27
0,17
0,50
60
M
0,08
41
61
40
0,13 NOM
80
21
1
20
Gage Plane
9,50 TYP
0,25
12,20
SQ
11,80
0,05 MIN
0°–7°
14,20
SQ
13,80
0,75
0,45
1,45
1,35
Seating Plane
0,08
1,60 MAX
4040135 /B 11/96
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Falls within JEDEC MS-026
1
POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products
Applications
Audio
www.ti.com/audio
amplifier.ti.com
dataconverter.ti.com
www.dlp.com
Automotive and Transportation www.ti.com/automotive
Communications and Telecom www.ti.com/communications
Amplifiers
Data Converters
DLP® Products
DSP
Computers and Peripherals
Consumer Electronics
Energy and Lighting
Industrial
www.ti.com/computers
www.ti.com/consumer-apps
www.ti.com/energy
dsp.ti.com
Clocks and Timers
Interface
www.ti.com/clocks
interface.ti.com
logic.ti.com
www.ti.com/industrial
www.ti.com/medical
Medical
Logic
Security
www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt
Microcontrollers
RFID
power.ti.com
Space, Avionics and Defense
Video and Imaging
www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
www.ti.com/video
microcontroller.ti.com
www.ti-rfid.com
www.ti.com/omap
OMAP Applications Processors
Wireless Connectivity
TI E2E Community
e2e.ti.com
www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2013, Texas Instruments Incorporated
相关型号:
TMS320F28054FPNQ
具有 60MHz 频率、128KB 闪存、InstaSPIN-FOC、PGA 的汽车类 C2000™ 32 位 MCU | PN | 80 | -40 to 125
TI
TMS320F28054MPNT
具有 60MHz 频率、128KB 闪存、InstaSPIN-MOTION、PGA 的 C2000™ 32 位 MCU | PN | 80 | -40 to 105
TI
©2020 ICPDF网 联系我们和版权申明